Home

EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers User`s Manual

1. 31 31 Models with Screw less Clamp Terminals 104 85 lt gt lt gt k 3 7X y zo YE ze TED SS a ALM al ALM m AE E O ID mie x B SES mE oO 5 O aler zi zm sa OTTERS se 70 FEL I 0 ES RIZ A Y dx xp PUTAS PO D Jk xp S qup ja 1 LT l e FE Y i c Y ta p Models with Screw Models with Screw less Terminals Clamp Terminals EDU 15 7 76 2 gt lt gt 60 E E V2 A E I Le H HA u i 60 Md Go rj s i i 50 c N 60 te 60 NM y 12 Installation Section 2 1 2 1 2 Mounting and Removing Terminal Blocks Connecting Units 1 2 3 1 Align the connectors and connect the Units to each other Ege 28 FFF
2. 26 EJ11 TC4 or EJ10 TC2 EUER Md Port A connector USB connection ul can be made using the E58 CIFQ1 Ols e e SB f sold separately CX Thermo for setting Paja ED e is aa NZ T Ho is mast Tom e LRL ay CU NO e Zu NO Zu NC Zu NANO MUN Eau Ne IN NZ IN NZ omy E 3 q e SA 7 Sd gt Sol oa Port B RS 485 CompoWay F DA NO e Qe a NO Aaa Qus amp 5 0 PASE CARD CHESS SAE a SAIA T 6 ze L PLC PT Computer O O O ODODO SOSOPO CD Go CD CD QD CD Gb D CD CD CD CD Gb D CD D CD CD Go CD Gp CD OD QD al ME ug aqi oq GO DOQO GO OOQO SOSISO DDOD GG Co D CD OD SOLVODO O O O G3ZA G3ZA G3ZA Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 Multiple Units with an HFU e The two auxiliary alarm outputs transistor outputs provided on the End Unit can be used e n addition to the two auxiliary alarm outputs provided on the End Unit the four event inputs and four transistor outputs on the HFU can be used e G3ZA outputs can be used
3. al el e blas e Cal EB ise ad IE IS eo sme 30 SENE SENE ES Co Lo a OE OC OE ee Cig 2 TC2 EJ1L I EDU Up to 64 Basic Units can be connected using distributed placement 4 channels x al 64 Units 256 channels et ely ela B Bn Sa sa ea Ed eS la sel selz selz as e Sula e Dies Aue Qe Que a S AS F Kp 180 F1 EJ1L I EDU Terminator 110 to 125 Q NE Ze Host device EE Y Terminator 110 to 125 Q 1 2 W Terminator 110 to 125 Q Terminator 110 to 125 Q 1 2 W 29 Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 Note Wire the connections indicated with dotted lines when settings for all EJ1 Controllers are being made from one port A connector If the connections indi cated with dotted lines are not wired the settings for group A can be made only using the port A connector for group A and the settings for group B can be made only using the port A connector for group B Connecting the G3ZA and e Up to 8 G3ZA Power Controllers can be connected to one TCA TC2 Unit EJ1 No
4. Y 5 SECTION 1 Outline This section describes the features nomenclature and functions of the EJ1 led Names OR Pars nit a 2 all XpDeardne8eoe sso ra e RS EPA Mere apad ira sida 2 1 1 2 Names of Parts on Front Panel o o oooooooooo o 2 1 1 3 Meanings of Indicators 0 om 2 lla Usine Setting Switches str 3 1 2 T O Configuration and Main Functions 0 0 00 eee eee eee 5 I 2 Lb TIO ConhsSurdUOT x SA x quchs C S eee tenes E Eb dias 5 12 7 Main Unit Euncdoln iso x c Reda iaa 6 I 2 9 Model Number Legend ariadna REDE EE E dw zd 7 1 5 Internal Block Dias taS vas ande be we pad aie S rata das dao gd 9 Names of Parts Section 1 1 1 1 Names of Parts 1 1 1 Appearance Front panel 2 lt DD gt 3 frg 00000000 Terminal block n s Oe _ Oe _ i Drowa J Cs liv DO OA EA pE B B iv TC4 TC2 or HFU TC4 TC2 or HFU EDU Screw Terminals Screw Less Clamp Terminals 1 1 2 Names of Parts on Front Panel Operation Indicators Port A connector COM1 COM2 COM3 Operation Indicators PWR RUN min OMRON com EJt COM2 ERR ALM E
5. PFP M Removing Terminal Blocks 1 2 3 1 Pull down the terminal block lever Bu A Ot ES e me amp l Pull down the lever 2 Pull off the terminal block Pull off the terminal block Le Note Screw and screw less terminal blocks cannot be exchanged Use the type of terminal block supplied with the TC Unit 15 16 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 2 2 Wiring Terminals 2 2 1 Terminal Arrangement TC4 Pulse voltage outputs OUT2 12 VDC OUT1 ii A mA E 4 mA V B V 4 A mA 4 mA V 5 V Platinum Thermocou Analog inputs resistance ple inputs 4 J thermometer Infrared ther inputs mosensor e Terminals A10 and B10 are not used on models with screw less clamp terminals Do not connect anything to these terminals e A G3ZA connector is located on the bottom of the Unit e When wiring voltage inputs be sure to wire the correct terminals Incorrect wiring may cause the EJ1 to fail Wiring Terminals TC2 e TI c Analog inputs resistance Section 2 2 Pulse voltage outputs
6. OSORIO ORORORERORE Serial Communications EJ1LJ HFU Board Unit MEME 4 Rs s se Shell e SW settings EJ1 HFU SW2 Description 8 ON RS 232C is selected CJ1W CIF1 1 EJ1C EDU To NS8 communications port A RS 485 Description ON Terminator connected ON 2 wire method ON 2 wire method 24 VDC Not used OFF No RS control of RD continual reception ON RS control of SD Note Port B cannot be used when the HFU EJ1 HFU is used 42 Control Linked to a Host Device Section 3 3 3 3 3 Setup TC4 Refer to 3 2 Multi channel Control for details on the EJ1 TC4 settings HFU The settings are made through communications The EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software can be connected using an E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable to set the parameters from a personal computer e The following table shows the parameters related to communications between the EJ1 and PLC as well as example settings Set the unit num ber of the HFU to O ame T Remarks Initial setting level 115 2 kbps Default Port C Communications Baud Rate Port C Communications Data Length See note 1 8 bit Port C Communications Parity See note 1 Port C Communications Stop Bits See note 1 1 bit Default Programless Common settings Programless Communications Protocol NT Link 1 N De
7. WAY Ni N DOBDW NI NIN NANA NIS NI NANA BW Note Connect the EDU on the right end of the EJ1 and the HFU on the left end 2 Slide the yellow sliders on the top and bottom of the Units until they click into place Slider 3 Attach the cover seal to the connector on the Unit on the left end of the EJ1 gt zz wwzfe AS E L eh Cover seal Im aja I Yi ES 7 A 13 Installation Section 2 1 Mounting to DIN Rail e Mount the EJ1 to DIN Rail e Use screws to secure the DIN Rail in at least 3 locations DIN Rail PFP 50N 50 cm or PFP 100N 100 cm e Install the DIN Rail vertically to the ground Y US Vertical OK Horizontal NG Installation Method Pull down the hooks on the bottoms of
8. Contact input Non contact input Platinum Thermocou ple inputs thermometer Infrared ther inputs mosensor e Terminals A10 and B10 are not used on models with screw less clamp terminals Do not connect anything to these terminals e A G3ZA connector is located on the bottom of the Unit e When wiring voltage inputs be sure to wire the correct terminals Incorrect wiring may cause the EJ1 to fail Port C SUBA SUB2 Contact input Non contact input SDB 4 SD gt RDA RD DO NOT USE SDA RS 422 RS 485 SG DO NOT USE RS 232C RS 422 e Terminals A10 and B10 are not used on models with screw less clamp terminals Do not connect anything to these terminals 17 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 ED Port A connector L These two ports cannot be used at the same time SUB2 COM These terminals are used for distributed placement of Units when an HFU is used Input power supply 2 2 2 Wiring Precautions e Separate input leads and power lines to protect the EJ1 from external noise e Use AWG22 cross sectional area 0 326 mm to AWG14 cross sec tional area 2 081 mm twisted pair cable for power supply and AWG28 cross sectional area 0 081 mm to AWG16 c
9. ch1 ch3 ch1 ch3 TC2 Thermocouple inputs Platinum resistance Analog inputs Infrared thermosensor thermometer inputs Control Outputs Terminals B1 to B3 and A1 to A3 on the TCA TC2 are for control outputs 4 20 0 20 mA DC TC2 with Linear Outputs 20 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Output type Specifications Pulse voltage Output voltage 12 VDC 15 PNP outputs Max load current 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit Transistor Max applicable voltage 30 VDC outputs Max load current 100 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max Leakage current 0 4 mA max Current out Current output range 4 to 20 mA resolution approx 2 800 puts O to 20 mA resolution approx 3 500 Load 500 Q max Auxiliary Outputs Auxiliary outputs are sent from pins B1 to B6 with the HFU and from pins 3 to 5 with the EDU EDU Output type Specifications Transistor Max operating voltage 30 VDC outputs Max load current 50 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max leakage current 0 4 mA max CT Inputs Only When the heater burnout HB heater overcurrent OC or heater short HS Controllers with Pulse alarm is to be used connect a Current Transformer CT across terminals A8 Outputs and A9 or terminals A7 and A9 no polarity on the TC2 TC2 e Use a E54 CT1 or E54 CT3 Current Transformer 21 Wiring Terminals Event Inputs Communications Note 22 Section 2 2 Connect e
10. 76 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 NW AT Calculated Gain Sets the gain used when calculating the PID constants in autotuning When emphasizing flexibility decrease set value When emphasizing stability increase the set value E AT Hysteresis The limit cycle operation during autotuning has a hysteresis when switching ON and OFF This parameter sets that hysteresis value E Limit Cycle MV Amplitude Sets the MV amplitude during limit cycle operation in autotuning Note This parameter is disabled for 100 AT E Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation When autotuning has been executed temporary autotuning will be executed if the deviation specified in this parameter is exceeded Note This parameter is disabled for 100 AT E 40 AT e The width of MV variation in the limit cycle can be changed with the Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter In this case autotuning will take longer to execute than it does with 100 AT e The timing of the limit cycle s onset depends on whether the deviation at the start of autotuning DV is less than the Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation Deviation gt Temporary AT Execution Deviation lt Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation Judgment Deviation Process Process Limit Cycle value Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 40 Vene MV Amplitude 4096 X Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation Default 150 0 i Set point
11. NN SDSS CIDIOKDIDKDKDIBIO POMOC EJ1LI HFU EJ1L TC4 EJ1L EDU or EJ1LI TC2 31 Unit Configuration Examples 32 Section 2 4 SECTION 3 Typical Control Examples This section describes the basic applications of the EJ1 using specific control examples 3 1 Minimum Configuration for Control o o o ooooooooooooooooo 34 Sl Application ctprssarrr cirios peeks 34 A E 35 FE O 35 Je AdU AAA A a A 37 3 2 Multi channel Control 0 0 0 0 ccc ce ooo a NA E 38 sz XDDHOA UOH arts ond cute ie A E SUAE EN 38 Beer WINNS eee Cae ae od eee ee de eA om a cae RS 39 972 35 SCP tls ua tinea eos ace M nbi aiuto aca eae D do d aod oT ed 39 Judd JAGIUS BIEIIG zou eco 346 Do Reb aw RS aa dera eee de ps 40 3 3 Control Linked to a Host Device o o ooooooooommmmorraa 4 FE ZADDHOSGUON sta vie ae VS ias 4 o WINS Ce ded aos Kor der doy te ad ee eV ap bb us redis an 42 PCM D TP re 43 Se JAGQJUSUBEIIE ii e o he rasta 44 3 4 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices 45 Sd ApplCduOn s ia daa RR Aged 45 O 4 An Das e ERES 48 3 4 4 Adjustment cia bra UE ea S 48 33 Minimum Configuration for Control 3 1 3 1 1 34 Minimum Configuration for Control Application Section 3 1 This section shows an example configuration for a small electric oven and explains how to set up and control
12. SP Ramp t ra SP after change SP Ramp Rise Value SP Ramp Time Unit Time SP before change Point of change The rate of change during SP ramp operation is specified by the SP Ramp Hise Value SP Ramp Fall Value and SP Ramp Time Unit parameters The SP ramp function will operate when the SP Ramp Rise Value or SP Ramp Fall Value is not set to O disabled The Ramp SP can be checked by using the Internal SP parameter Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Variable type Parameter name Setting monitoring range E5 A5 See note 1 SP Ramp Time Unit 0 Seconds 1 Channel 1 Minutes DO 90 SP Ramp Rise Value O to 9999 EU s or min BANK See note 2 SP Ramp Fall Value O to 9999 EU s or min BANK See note 2 Internal SP Channel 1999 to 9999 EU Conditions for use No special conditions Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 2 The function is stopped if this parameter is setto O The unit is determined by the setting of the SP Ramp Time Unit parameter The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks Note Refer to 4 4 8 Alarm SP Selection for details on alarms during SP ramp operation Operation at Startup If the SP ramp function is enabled when the Controller is turned ON or switched from STOP to RUN mode the process value may reach the set point using the SP ramp function in the same w
13. Bro Noted JO o O Brio foue OO OOO C a S Bti2 Noted JO O OOOO S C S Bri mouse OO S Biss Nouse O A LL I O Error Status C4 84 0005 Bit position pod Bit description Ba owsa O Bs nowa O S Be Ntued OO B7 Norte B8 Notused O S Bio Norte Brio Ntued O Bm Ntued OO S Brio Ntued O S Brig Ntued OO Ca a O Bs Now A 1 1 LS 243 Status Lists Appendix I O Alarm A Status C4 84 0006 Bit position o Bit description Meaning 9 1 Bia Ned STC 0 S Bs Notused A S Ba owsa O S S Bs Nowa O S Be Ntued O S B7 Note B8 LOTO A S Bio Nouws S Brio Ntued O S pti Ntued O S B2 Ntued O S Bii owsa O S S Biti4 Notued 0 0000000 pitts Nouse I O Alarm B Status C4 84 0007 Bit position ML EE Bit description Bii CTTHS Alarm Bs owsa O 0 S B7 awa O B8 nowa O S B9 Norte Bo Nowa OO Bm owsa O O S B2 w OO O S Ce a B4 Nowa O Bs nous A 1 LS 244 Status Lists Appendix I O Notification A Status C4 84 0009 Bit position NL UE Bit description Meaning Hold Bit O CT1 Heater Current Updated The heater current monitor has not been updated Hold because the control output ON time is less than 100 ms Ba Nue Bia Ntued O Bis Nousd AA Bit 4 CT2 He
14. Connector between Units Connector between Units EDU iii Port A connector TTL conversion circuit Port A communications 1 Port B communications Ey x 1 I I I I I I I I I 1 1 I I I I I I I I Y Transistor dE Auxiliary output 1 Transistor T l E Auxiliary output 2 E outputs y P AS Internal bus 1 Drive 2x 3 circuit Internal bus 2 Drive zs Circuit Connector between Units O O 2 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 M 24 VDC Input power supply 24 VDC Functional isolation a a a d 10 SECTION 2 Preparations This section describes the preparations required to use the EJ 1 including installation wiring and switch settings DM SSA AUG scat x Sp cies doe DOR OM tae ode a tor OR sc OR D Ee cee a ane das 12 2 I 1 Dimensions Umt mm 53er RERERE RP EUG RA GUERRE ow ks 12 2 1 2 Mounting and Removing Terminal Blocks 13 2 2 Minne Terminals sou ees vd 6o rentur mere S eos Ed EA LET 16 2 2 1 Je munalArrangedi nio erui X bRG VEG HERE Cae e ut rra 16 2 2 2 Witine Precautions 2 0 9 es oa Paes RISE UE SE E a Fees 18 242599 WING A RA RS ete 19 223 Using Tool BORS 2 q S EE dt a a Reo e 23 2 352 Poced 14 tid trot Educa Foe pei ep ed o Ted add seed x 25 2 4 Unit Configuration Examples 0 0 cc eee le
15. 0 0 to 210 0 K 200 to 1300 300 to 2300 6 20 010500 0 0 0 to 900 0 J 100to850 100to 1500 8 20 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 750 0 T 9 20010400 300to 700 199 9 to 400 0 199 9 to 700 0 N 199 9 to 400 0 w ESTE etl Sensor Analog Current Any one of the following ranges inputs input by scaling Voltage 1999 to 9999 input 199 9 to 999 9 29 Oto 10 V 19 99 to 99 99 1 999 to 9 999 i 51 Setting Input Specifications Section 4 1 4 1 2 Temperature Inputs B Temperature Unit Either C or F can be selected Variable type Setting range Deiauk EO AO Temperature unit Channel 0 C 1 F Conditions for use The input type must be set to temperature input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped E Cold Junction Compensation Method Specifies whether cold junction compensation is performed in the Tempera ture Controller or externally Enable external cold junction compensation when using two thermocouples to measure a temperature difference or using a external cold junction com pensator for even greater precision Variable type Setting range Default EO AO Cold Junction Compensation 0 External Method Common 1 Internal Conditions for use The input type must be set to thermocouple or infrared temperature sensor Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 4 1 3 Analog Inputs When an analog input is selecte
16. 00000003 9 Port C Communications Baud Rate HFU H D H 00000006 57 H 00000007 0022 Port B Communications Data Length TC4 H 00000000 7 0 E Common TC2 H 00000001 i uu Port C Communications Data Length HFU met 0023 Port B Communications ES TN H 00000000 None 0 Common EN at 5 5 i 0024 Port B Communications Stop Bits TC4 TC2 H 00000000 1 0 _ fe dl Common nu ae Port C Communications Stop Bits HFU AE qme 0025 Port B Send Wait Time TCA TC2 H 00000000 to H 00000063 0 to 99 ms Common un NE Port C Send Wait Time HFU sme qme 0026 E Port A Communications Send Wait Time H 00000001 to H 00000063 1 to 99 1 ms Common e je Not used 0029 Proportional Band x10 Compensation H 00000000 Disabled 0 Common H 00000001 Enabled 1 o il Programless Communications Protocol Not used E T l I M H 00000004 AnA AnU CPU common commands 4 H 00000005 MC protocol format 5 5 0031 Programless Communications Upload Data H 00000000 Area H 00000001 NT Link 1 N H 00000002 H 00000003 H 00000004 H 00000005 H 00000006 H 00000007 H 00000008 H 00000009 H 0000000A H 0000000B H 0000000C 12 H 0000000D MC protocol format 5 H 00000000 Data register D 0 H 00000001 Link register W 1 H 00000002 File register R 2 0032 Programless Communications Download Data H 00000000 Area H 00000001 NT Link 1 N H 00000002 H 0000
17. Command 01 06 FFFF 0A00 8F4E CRC 16 Response 01 06 FFFF 0A00 8F4E CRC 16 188 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 7 5 4 Echoback Test This service executes an echoback test Command Function code Slave Fixed data Test data CRC 16 address H 08 H OO H 00 1 1 2 Response Function code Slave Fixed data Test data CRC 16 address H 08 H OO H 00 2 2 1 we um Any data in 2 byte hexadecimal format 2 Response Codes Function Error Cause code code H 88 H O1 Function code error A function code that is not supported was specified e The fixed data was not H 0000 The service was processed normally Command Response Example Slave address H 01 Test data H 1234 Command 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C CRC 16 Response 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C CRC 16 H O3 Variable data error e The command is too long e The command is not long enough 189 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 190 SECTION Errors and Error Processing This section describes methods for checking possible problems in operation depending on classifications of Temperature Controller status 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 Things to Check First Determining Errors from Indicators 0 0 0 cee ees Determining the Error from the Status 20 0 000 e eee eee Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Determining the Error from
18. CompoWay F RS 485 RS 232C FLZ EOD ND RS 422 Screw terminals Screw less clamp terminals Advanced Unit lt O D Standard control 1 0 Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 EDU Type C Common model oj JC d 01 a UJA N F Internal Block Diagrams Section 1 3 1 3 TC4 Internal Block Diagrams ey Maa E af ain inpu E input JURE I Main input 2 MATS a ETEN input circuit P ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee New eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ele uc MONTIRBUUS a ere input E Connector between Units TC2 Pisis LEN Q PA N Main input 1 PA N input circuit vem ee ne ene ee wees eee eee amp Pr A ns im me A i as SS RE BEN CT input 1 CT input 2 Event input 1 Event input 2 Mr mm L See note 1 Pi AE Connector between Units Note e s 4 e Waveform shaping circuit Waveform shaping circuit 4E 3 L shaping circuit Waveform shaping circuit Microcomputer gt MERI Internal buses 1 to 3 ooo a G3ZA communications L p I L I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 L 1 4 Connector between Units 1 i 1 i 1 1 Y A A A Switch IEEE EE Internal buses 1 to 3 Ead Ea
19. Example Calculation of Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications Channel Operation command Operation command code hexadecimal Run 2008 All units All channels 2809 Stop 40 AT Execute 100 AT Execute Any unit number between 0 and 31 or all Units can be selected Any channel between 1 and 4 or all channels can be selected Programless Communications Section 5 1 Structure of Operation Command Bitposition Meaning Codes for 0 Al channels specified 1 bit Programless Related information 2 bits 3 A Units specified 1 bit Communications Unit specification 6 bits Command code 6 bits 141 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Details of Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications All channels specified Related Information All Units specified o e A Write Mode Software Reset Run Stop Manual Auto 40 AT Execute 100 AT Execute AT Cancel Bank 0 Change Bank 1 Change Bank 2 Change Bank 3 Change Local SP Change Remote SP Change o Topo Reset Error O O O O O OF OF OF OF O ty A A O O Alarm 1 Latch Cancel gt l l SS ESA EI Sel el el el l Sl el e ol eG ol oe el oe qe a e es esl esl xl e Alarm 2 Latch Cancel O O OF OF OF Al Alo O O O O O O O h ek h Alarm 3 Latch Cancel All Alarm Latch Ca
20. Heater burnout HB alarm setting range 0 1 to 99 9 A in units of 0 1 A 0 0 A Heater burnout HB alarm output turns OFF 100 0 A Heater burnout HB alarm output turns ON Min detection ON time 100 ms See note 1 Heater short HS alarm setting range 0 1 to 99 9 A in units of 0 1 A 0 0 A Heater short HS alarm output turns ON 100 0 A Heater short alarm HS output turns OFF Min detection OFF time 100 ms See note 2 Heater overcurrent OC alarm setting 0 1 to 99 9 A in units of 0 1 A range 0 0 A Heater overcurrent OC alarm output turns ON 100 0 A Heater overcurrent OC alarm output turns OFF Min detection ON time 100 ms See note 1 Note 1 Heater burnouts and heater overcurrents are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less 216 Specifications Appendix Detection is also sometimes not possible if a contactor is used for the control output 2 A heater short is not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less Detection is also sometimes not possible if a contactor is used for the control output Characteristics Toure Wru bU Indication accuracy Thermocouple input 0 5 of indication value PV or 1 C platinum resistance whichever is greater 1 digit max See note thermometer input 3 Analog input 20 5 FS 1 digit max IEEE CNN Heater burnout CT input 5 6 FS 1 digit max ee Aa Proportional band P 0 1 t
21. Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so take that into account when setting the detection current Load Heater example AC line To CT input To CT input c V Connection Refer to the following diagram for CT installation posi tions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so take that into account when setting the detection current 89 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 To CT input Load Heater example AC line To CT input Calculating the Heater Calculate the set value with the following equation Burnout Detection Normal current value Burnout current value Current Value Set value E AAT LES To set the value of the heater burnout when two or more heaters are con nected through the CT use the current value of the smallest heater con nected When all of the heaters have the same current value use the current value when one of the heaters has burned out Be sure that the following conditions are satisfied Heater with a current of less than 10 0 A Current value at normal operation Current value at heater burnout 1 A When the difference is less than 1 A detection is unstable Heater of current 10 0 A or more Current value at normal operation Current value at heater burnout 2 2 5 A When the difference is less than 2 5 A detection is unstable e The setting range is 0 1 to 99 9 A Heater burnout is not detected when the setti
22. In ON OFF control the control output turns OFF when the currently controlled temperature reaches a preset set point When the manipulated variable turns OFF the temperature begins to fall and the control output is turned ON again This operation is repeated at a certain level The Hysteresis Heating param eter determines how much the temperature must fall before the control output is turned ON again Also the Direct Reverse Operation parameter determines whether the manipulated variable is increased or decreased in response to an increase or decrease in the process value E Hysteresis ON OFF control incorporates a hysteresis setting to stabilize operation when switching ON and OFF The width of the hysteresis loop determines the sensi tivity e The control output heating and control output cooling hysteresis set tings are made with the Hysteresis Heating and Hysteresis Cooling parameters respectively he sensitivity of standard control heating or cooling is set with the Hys teresis Heating parameter regardless of the setting of the Direct Reverse Operation parameter e The Hysteresis Cooling parameter is effective only when using heating cooling control pee Heating pues Cooling point Sn point Heating control Cooling control Variable type Setting range Defauit D5 95 Hysteresis Heating Channel 0 1 to 999 9 EU Hysteresis Cooling Channel 0 1 to 999 9 EU Conditions for use
23. Local SP 1 23 Remote SP range Input range SP Limiter range If the remote SP exceeds the upper limit of the input range the internal SP is limited to the sensor s upper limit value If the remote SP exceeds the SP Lower Limit the internal SP is limited to the SP Lower Limit The remote SP s range will not be changed automatically even if the input type or SP Limiter is changed Use an event input or operation command to switch between the remote SP and local SP When using an event input for switching set the Event Input Assignment to Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 After making the event input set ting the SP will operate as shown in the following table Event input Selects the local SP Selects the remote SP Note Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands for details on using an oper ation command to switch the SP B SP Tracking If SP Tracking is enabled the local SP inherits the remote SP value when the SP is switched from the remote SP to the local SP The following diagram shows how the SP mode is switched when SP Tracking is enabled SP Remote SP RSP input Time 1 When the SP is at LSP1 and operation is switched to the remote SP the SP switches to RSP2 2 The SP progresses according to the remote SP input 3 Ifthe SP Tracking function is enabled when control is switched to the local SP the SP will become LSP2 If SP Tracking is disabled the SP wil
24. e Channels 3 and 4 are supported only by the TC4 Bank bit O Bank bit 1 Channel 4 Channel 3 Bank bit O Stop 0 Run 1 Bank bit 1 Run 0 Stop 1 Stop 0 Run 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Run 0 Stop 1 E Bus Output Assignments TC4 C2 Bus input 1 Settable parameters Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 e Bus inputs 2 and 3 can be set in the same way All channels Disabled Temperature Controller Error e Channels 3 and 4 are supported only by the TC4 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1 a Alarm 1 to 3 All Alarm OR All Alarm OR All Alarm AND All Alarm AND Alarm 1 to 3 OR Input Error Alarm 1 to 3 AND RSP Input Error Input Error OR HB Heater Burnout Alarm RSP Input Error OR HS Heater Short Alarm HB Heater Burnout Alarm OR OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm HS Heater Short Alarm OR Bank bit O OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm OR Bank bit 1 Event Input 1 to 4 Stop 0 Run 1 F2 B2 Bus Input 1 to 3 Run 0 Stop 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 Note Temperature Controller Error The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when an bit between bit O and bit 13 in the Device A Status is ON It can be used to output EJ1 error status
25. e o e o ee ee ie Hysteresis Heating ES Hysteresis Cooling e Manual MV e Disturbance Gain e Disturbance Time Constant e Disturbance Rectification Band e Disturbance Judgment Width e jw sr For address adjustment only Other Not used Note 0 Can be allocated Cannot be allocated 253 Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications Appendix 254 Numerics 100 AT 77 2 PID control 64 Derivative action 66 Integral action 65 Proportional action 63 2 PID control two degrees of freedom PID 65 40 AT 77 A addresses Modbus communications 183 Advanced Unit HFU xvii 6 109 alarm delay 85 alarm hysteresis 83 Alarm Output 1 240 Alarm SP Selection 86 alarm types 82 analog inputs 52 appearance 2 ASCII table 219 AT Autotuning xvii AT calculated gain 77 AT hysteresis 77 auto mode 74 autotuning AT 76 auxiliary output allocations 152 bank function 100 bank number 100 Basic Unit Expand Unit Alarm Status TCA TC2 246 Expand Unit 1 Alarm 246 Expand Unit 2 Alarm 246 Expand Unit 3 Alarm 246 Expand Unit 4 Alarm 246 Expand Unit 5 Alarm 246 Expand Unit 6 Alarm 246 Expand Unit 7 Alarm 246 Expand Unit 8 Alarm 246 Basic Unit Expand Unit Error Status TC4 TC2 246 Expand Unit 1 Error 246 Expand Unit 2 Error 246 Expand Unit 3 Error 246 Index Expand Unit 4 Error 246 Expand Unit 5 Error 246 Expand Unit 6 Error 246
26. i Gb Gp ess s es e s e e Swi uf MID F Ep PAPA E QD SW2 opebsdsae e Gc ac S d RS i i 2 TC4 TC2 or HFU EDU 1 1 3 Meanings of Indicators Operation Indicators TC4 and TC2 Name Color Memmg ERR Red Flashes or lights when an erar ocous AUM Hed Lighis when an alarm is activated Names of Parts Section 1 1 HFU Name Color Memhg RUN Gem ooo ERR Red Flashes or lights when an erar ocous AM Rea Lights when an alarm is activated Note Some time is required for the indicators to light after the power is turned ON 1 1 4 Using Setting Switches e Check that the EJ1 is turned OFF before operating the switches The set tings are enabled when the power is turned ON e Set the switches with a small flat blade screwdriver Do not set the switches midway between settings Setting the Unit SW1 and SW2 are used together to set the unit number to between 00 and Number 63 Note The factory setting is unit number 01 07 f SW1 Unit Number Settings SW 14320 1 12 3 4 5 16 17 8 9 A B C DJ EJF
27. 0100 Pe Process Value CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 0100 HERE NE 0200 Process Value CH3 EXNESE 0800 Process Value CH4 HET ERE E Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 Monitor Not used 0009 SePem ci F FFFEFe8t 10 H 0000870F 199910 9999 See noe2 EU on Je gt 0004 WemVauei CHi H FFFEF881 t10 H 0000270F C1999 t0 9900 See note 2 EU on gt 0005 Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 GHT F FFFFFBST o H 0000270 199810 9999 See note 2 EU on e gt 0006 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 CH1 F FFFFFBST to H 0000270F C1999 t0 9999 See note 2 EU on Je gt 0007 Alarm Value 2 0H1 HFFFFBSTtoHFODoOZ OF i999109999 Geemoe2 EU on e gt 0008 Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 EU ch e j 0009 Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 2 EU John e J Not used Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 et Point CH3 Set Point CH4 Note 1 The values in the current bank will be used for all set values 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 221 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus
28. 011E E G3ZA1 CH3 SSR Short Circuit Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 50 A NUM j G3ZA1 CT3 SSR Short Circuit Detection H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 EE Value 011F E G3ZA1 CH4 SSR Short Circuit Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 50 A NUM j G3ZA1 CT4 SSR Short Circuit Detection m H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 pesce eene e Value 0120 ME G3ZA1 CH1 Heater Overcurrent Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 50 A NUM j G3ZA1 CT1 Heater Overcurrent Detec H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 Bp eR qe tion Value 0121 IE G3ZA1 CH2 Heater Overcurrent Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 50 A NUM G3ZA1 CT2 Heater Overcurrent Detec ETE H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 165 Al NUM tion Value 0122 E G3ZA1 CH3 Heater Overcurrent Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 50 A NUM j G3ZA1 CT3 Heater Overcurrent Detec ETE H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 165 Al NUM tion Value 0123 a G3ZA1 CH4 Heater Overcurrent Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 50 A NUM j G3ZA1 CT4 Heater Overcurrent Detec H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 165 Al NUM V2 tion Value 0124 G3ZA1 Offset Control H 00000000 Disabled 0 1 NUM H 00000001 Enabled 1 lt 229 Parameter List Ap
29. 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA input impedance 150 Q max EN Power supply voltage Input Voltage input 1 to 5 V O to 5 V Oto 10 V input impedance 1 MQ min Control outputs Voltage output Output voltage 12 VDC Load current 21 mA with short circuit protection circuit Max operating voltage 30 VDC Max load current 100 mA Residual voltage 1 5 V max Leakage current 0 4 mA max Transistor output Auxiliary outputs transistor outputs Max operating voltage 30 VDC max load current 50 mA residual voltage 1 5 V max leakage current 0 4 mA max ON 1 ka max OFF T00 kamin orem A ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max A OFF Leakage current 0 1 mA max Controtmethod 2PDoONOFFcow f o o Other functions Depend on the model Ambient temperature range Operating 10 C to 55 C Stored 25 C to 65 C with no icing or condensation Ambient humidity range Operating 25 to 85 Stored 25 to 85 2 000 m max Current output 4 to 20 mA DC resolution approx 2 800 0 to 20 mA DC resolution approx 3 500 Load 500 max Inrush current power supply Unit 15 A or less Installation environment Overvoltage Category II Pollution Class 2 IEC 61010 1 compliant HB Heater Burnout Alarms HS Heater Short Alarms and OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm Maximum heater current Single Phase 100 A AC Input current indication accuracy x596 FS x1 digit max
30. Communications port An compatible Com AJ71UC24 RS 232C or RS 422 485 puter Link Unit AnS compatible Com A1SJ71UC24 R2 HS 232C PUISSE A1SJ71UC24 R4 RS 422 485 A1SJ71UC24 PRF RS 232C Use an AnA or AnU CPU Module Communications port Communication Spe FX3U 232ADP RS 232C cial Adapter FX3U 485ADP RS 485 Function Expansion FX3U 232 BD RS 232C Board FX3U 485 BD RS 485 5 1 2 Checking Operation Checking Operation with SYSMAC CS CJ Series PLCs 1 2 3 This section describes how to check operation for the configuration shown below EJ1 HFU TC EDU SYSMAC CS CJ Series EJ lea e estes e RS 232C 485 1 Connect the EJ1 and PLC Connect the EJ1N HFU and Serial Communications Unit as shown in the following diagram 111 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e RS 232C SYSMAC CJ CS Series EJ1N HFULJ NFLK RS 232C Turn ON pin 8 of SW2 to set RS 232C e RS 485 SYSMAC CJ CS Series EJ1N HFUL NFLK OOOO 8 5 S 22 e Attach terminating resistance 110 to 125 Q to pins 6 and 7 on the EDU port B if there are problems with communications noise resistance Note Refer to Related Manuals on page xiv for the operating methods for SYSMAC CS CJ
31. Connection port C USB E Note Match the serial port and unit Computer USB number settings to the system EDU Connector The serial port setting in the The driver for the E58 CIFQ1 USB EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Serial Conversion Cable is not Support Software communi installed cations settings does not Install the driver from the CD ROM show E58 CIFQ1 included with the product There is no device on the Specify a unit number in the commu communications path with the nications settings for a device on the specified unit number communications path There is a device on the com Change the unit number in the com munications path with the munications settings so that the unit same unit number numbers are not duplicated The Programmable Terminal Both the Support Software and a is connected directly to port A Programmable Terminal cannot be and performing communica connected to port A tions Either turn OFF the Programmable Terminal or move the Programmable Terminal to the System Screen and stop Programmable Terminal com munications 200 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 Status Possible cause Countermeasure Cannot connect online There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the EJ1 supply terminal Connection There is no power supply to Supply power to the Interface Con the Interface Converter verter PC RS 232C The EST
32. Status Status SP SP Alarm value 1 Alarm value 1 The HFU reads the value written to the PLC memory Alarm value 2 Alarm value 2 The read setting is written to the setting for the TC4 CS1W SCU21 V1 See note CS1W SCB41 V1 See note ICSi Seres RS2920 CP1H Series RS 232C or RS 232C or RS 422A 485 RS 422A 485 See note 3 See note 3 Use only products manufactured on or after December 20 1999 For details refer to the CS CJ Series Serial Communications Boards Units Operation Manual Cat No W336 2 Programless communications may stop if a momentary power interrup tion occurs at the CPU Unit when programless communications are being used for a communications port on the CPU Unit If they do stop either cycle the EJ1 power supply or execute a software reset 3 An Option Board sold separately is required Programless Communications Section 5 1 Communications port Communications port Channel 1 Channel 2 Q compatible Serial QJ71C24N RS 232C RS 422 485 Communications Unit QJ71C24 QJ71C24N R2 RS 232C RS 232C QJ71C24 R2 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS Series Note MELSEC An AnS Series Note MELSEC FX3UC Series QnA compatible Sera QnAS compatibl Serial Communica 94SJ71QC24N R2 RS 232C RS 232C tions Unit Direct connections to the EJ1 are possible only with RS 232C or RS 422 Name Moa
33. force 0202 Channel Alarm Status CHi See Status Lists on page 240 e _ foros 0208 itemarSP CHi HFFRFFBG1 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note EU e 0104 0204 Local SP Montor CHi H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note EU e 0105 0205 Remote SP Monitor CHI H FERFFBG1 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note EU e oros 0206 Bank No Montor cH1 m oooooooot Hr 00000008 oros e e 0107 0207 MV Monitor Heating CHI H FERFFFCE to H 0000041A 50191050 e en e f 0108 0208 MV Monitor Cooling CH1 H FFFFFFCE to H o000041A 5 0101050 e a e j foros 0208 Decimal Point Monitor CH1 m oooooooot Hr 00000008 003 Je Process Value CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 A OS Note The Remote SP Monitor CH2 parameter is supported only by the TC4 0300 0600 Process Value CH3 Note The Remote SP Monitor CH3 parameter cannot be used TOA 0400 0800 Process Value CH4 Note The Remote SP Monitor CH4 parameter cannot be used TC4 Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 C5 85 Monitor 0100 0220 Heater Current Value 1 Monitor H 00000000 to H 0000044C 0 0 to 110 0 Pe Ja ho Tc2 Not used 0200 0420 Heater Current V
34. Baza Y LLE RS 422 E SDA x AX e Refer to the users manual if using a Communications Module for the QnA QnAS Series 116 Programless Communications Section 5 1 2 Make the PLC settings Use the GX Developer to make the communications settings Start the GX Developer double click PLC Parameter under Parameter in the project tree click the I O Assignment Setting Tab click the Switch Setting Button on the I O Assignment Setting Tab Page and then set the communications p of the Serial Communications Unit as outlined below Channel Description mE Independent WP fogao 8 MMM Payon vs sows Checksum s ON Ung modifica Allowed tions E to b15 Communications 115200 bps OBH rate setting SW02 Communications protocol setting MC protocol format 5 0005H aM ima ym swoa Samese mgsasSWo Station number setting mE 0000H Note To set a different baud rate from that given above refer to Baud Hate Set ting on page 129 and change OB 2 Refer to MELSEC QnA QnAS Series on page 129 if using a Communi cations Module for the QnA QnAS Series 3 Make the EJ1 settings When using RS 232C turn ON pin 8 on SW 2 to select RS 232C and make the settings shown in the following table No other settings are re quired Variable type Setting Monitor values FO BO Programless Communications Protocol 5 MC protocol format 5 Common Port C Send Wait Time Common For the
35. Bit4 Expand Unit Connection Fault Bits 5 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used Configuration Error B Status Expand Unit 1 Error Expand Unit 2 Error Expand Unit 3 Error Expand Unit 4 Error Expand Unit 5 Error Expand Unit 6 Error Expand Unit 7 Error Expand Unit 8 Error Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used C4 84 000B Error Channel A Status Bito CH1 NS Bit 1 CH2 Bit2 CH3 Bit3 CH4 Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used CH2 to CH4 are the same as CH1 C4 84 0004 Internal Communications Error Status Expand Unit 1 Communications Error Expand Unit 2 Communications Error Expand Unit 3 Communications Error Expand Unit 4 Communications Error Expand Unit 5 Communications Error Expand Unit 6 Communications Error Expand Unit 7 Communications Error Expand Unit 8 Communications Error Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used C4 84 0002 C4 84 0003 C4 84 0101 C4 84 0201 ch 2 C4 84 0301 ch 3 C4 84 0401 ch 4 Channel Status RUN STOP ch 1 ma Auto Manual AT Execute Cancel SP Mode Bit8 Input Error Bit9 RSP Input Error Bits 10 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used Error Channel A Status bits will not turn ON even if a bit between bit O and bit 3 in the Channel Statu
36. Expand Unit 7 Error 246 Expand Unit 8 Error 246 Basic Units TC4 and TC2 6 bus I O assignments 102 bus output assignment 153 C CO Status HFU 249 Communications Writing 249 EEPROM 249 Write Mode 249 CO Status TC4 TC2 240 Alarm Output 1 240 Alarm Output 2 240 Alarm Output 3 240 AT Execute Cancel 240 Auto Manual 240 Communications Writing 240 EEPROM 240 Input error 240 RUN STOP 240 SP Mode 240 Write Mode 240 calculating input shift values 54 calculating the heater burnout detection current value 90 calculating the heater overcurrent detection value 97 calculating the heater short detection current value 96 ch Channel xvii changing the bank 100 Channel Alarm Status TC4 TC2 248 Alarm 1 248 Alarm 2 248 Alarm 3 248 HB Alarm 248 Heater Overcurrent 248 HS Alarm 248 MV Limiter Reverse Operation 248 OC Alarm 248 Set Point Limiter Out of Range 248 Set Value Limiter Reverse Operation 248 Channel Status TC4 TC2 248 AT Execute Cancel 248 Auto Manual 248 Input Error 248 RSP Input Error 248 255 Index RUN STOP 248 SP Mode 248 characteristics 217 checking operation 111 115 119 close in alarm 85 closed in alarm or open in alarm 85 command frame 158 BCC 158 ETX 158 FINS mini command text 158 SID 158 STX 158 Sub address 158 Unit No 158 command frame formant 158 communications settings 156 157 178 179 communic
37. HFU 201 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 Status Possible cause Countermeasure The EJ1 does not appear in There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the CX Integrator s Compo the EJ1 supply terminal Way F network CX one is not compatible with Use a version of CX One that is com the EJ1 patible with the EJ1 Ver 1 12 or Connection later The Serial Communications Correct the communications settings Board SCB Unit SCU and for the Serial Communications Unit the EJ1 communications set User default settings User settings tings do not match Serial communications mode SCB SCU Serial Gateway Data length 7 bit Stop bits 2 bit Parity Even bit Baud rate 38 4 kbps RS 485 EJ1 Refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual W445 SCB SCU CJ1W CIF1 1 Fiore Convener Note The Serial Communications RS 485 EJ1 Board SCByUnit SCU must be unit version 1 2 or later Refer to Unit Versions of CS Connection port CJ series Serial Communica tions Boards Units in the Serial Connection Communications Board Unit port Operation Manual W336 for Computer DEI information on checking unit p versions so j EJ1 Port A EDU 202 Section 8 4 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Direct Connection of No Communications Between the EJ1 and a Directly C
38. Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 Proportional action In proportional action the MV is proportional to the deviation control error e Integral action This control action produces an output that is propor tional to the time integral of the control error An off set normally occurs in proportional control so proportional action is used in combination with inte gral action As time passes this offset disappears and the control temperature process value matches the set point 65 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 e Derivative action This control action produces an output that is propor tional to the rate of change of the input Since propor tional control and integral control correct for errors in the control result the control system will be slow to respond to sudden changes in temperature The derivative action performs a corrective action by increasing the MV in proportion to the slope of the temperature change e Effect of Changes to P Proportional Band Increased P The curve rises gradually and the settling time is long but overshooting is prevented Decreased P Overshooting and hunting occur but the set value is reached quickly and the temperature stabilizes Set value e Effect of Changes to In
39. Refer to Status Lists on page 240 for details on Device A Status Variable type Setting range Defauit Bus Input 1 to 3 Assignment TC4 0 to 132 Common TC2 0 to 69 Bus Output 1 to 3 Assignment TC4 0 to 150 Common TC2 0 to 87 Conditions for use No special conditions 103 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON m Example Example In this example an All channels Alarm 1 OR output and an All channels Alarm 2 OR output are output to the End Unit s auxiliary outputs All channels Alarm 1 OR output Bus Output 1 Assignment All channels Alarm 1 OR Bus Output 2 Assignment All channels Alarm 2 OR All channels Note Hefer to 4 4 Setting Alarm Specifications Alarm 1 OR output for details on the alarm settings SUB1 SUB2 All channels Alarm 2 OR output Note When assigning bus I O disable all bus I O assignments first and then make the settings 4 7 4 Using G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers Note Version 2 G3ZA Power Controllers can also be connected to version 1 0 EJ1 Temperature Controllers Initial Settings The following procedure is required in order to use a G3ZA The G3ZA cannot be used in the condition in which it is shipped 1 2
40. Response Frame Text STX Unit No Sub address End code FINS mini commandtext ETX BCC D TA TA TA 1 2 2 2 1 1 BCC calculation range End Codes gue m olus nt A Error detection priority OF 1 FINS command error The specified FINS command could not be executed 10 Parity error The OR of 1 bits in received data does not match the setting for the communications parity Stop bit is 0 A _ The next data was received when the reception data buffer JENNI was full The calculated BCC value is different from the received BCC value s o error The FINS mini command text contains characters other than 7 0 to 9 and A to F For details on the echoback test refer to 6 4 10 Echoback Test SID and the FINS mini command text are not included Sub address error The sub address is not included 6 Frame length error The received frame exceeds the specified number of bytes 00 Normal completion Command processing was completed normally B End Code Example When the Sub address SID and FINS mini Command Text Are Not Included e Command STX UnitNo ETX BCC s ERN e Response STX Unit No Sub address End code ETX BCC LU LAE EPI The sub address is 00 and the end code is 16 sub address error 159 FINS mini Text 6 3 FINS mini Text 6 3 1 Section 6 3 The FINS mini command and response text is the text that form the command and response communications PDU
41. Set point Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation Default 150 0 i Time i n Time Autotuning starts Autotuning completed Autotuning starts Autotuning completed E 100 AT e When autotuning starts it operates as shown below regardless of the deviation DV When you want to shorten the time it takes for autotuning select 100 AT Note The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude and Temporary AT Execution Judgment Devia tion parameters are disabled Process value Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 10096 Set point Time A Autotuning starts Autotuning completed T Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 RT Robust Tuning When autotuning is executed with RT selected PID constants are automati cally set that make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when control object s characteristics change e Selecting the RT mode in the following cases will help to prevent hunting from occurring e When the set temperature is not fixed and is changed in a wide range e When there are large variations in ambient temperatures due to factors such as seasonal changes or differences between day and night tem peratures e When there are large variations in ambient wind conditions and air flow e When heater characteristics change depending on the temperature e When an actuator with disproportional I O such as a phase control type power regulator is used e When a rapidly heating heater is used e W
42. event inputs TC2 101 F FINS 158 FINS mini command services 161 FINS mini command text 160 FINS mini response text 160 FINS mini text 160 FINS mini variable type and address 160 frame configuration 158 function code 180 181 182 Index G G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller 24 G3ZA Power Controller 104 GX Developer 117 122 H HB Heater burnout xvii heater burnout alarm HB alarm 87 heater overcurrent alarm OC alarm 96 heater short alarm HS alarm 94 heating cooling control 68 HFU xvii 6 17 HFU bus output assignments 153 HFU internal buses 152 HS Heater short xvii hysteresis 64 I integral time 66 I O Alarm A Status TC4 TC2 244 CTI Heater Overcurrent 244 CT2 Heater Overcurrent 244 I O Alarm B Status TC4 TC2 244 CTI HB Alarm 244 CTI HS Alarm 244 CTI OC Alarm 244 CT2 HB Alarm 244 CT2 HS Alarm 244 CT2 OC Alarm 244 I O configuration 5 I O Error Status TC4 TC2 243 Main Input 1 Count Error 243 Main Input 2 Count Error 243 Main Input 3 Count Error 243 Main Input 4 Count Error 243 T O Notification A Status TC4 TC2 245 CTI Heater Current Hold 245 CT2 Heater Current Hold 245 Infrared Temperature Sensor 51 initial settings 104 input filter 56 input shift 53 input type 51 internal block diagram 9 257 internal buses TC4 and TC2 102 Internal Communications Error Status TC4 TC2 243 Expand Unit 1 Communications E
43. responses Variable area Read write Personal computer 7 4 1 Addresses Refer to Parameter List on page 221 for parameter addresses Parameters with the following variable types can be used with the Modbus protocol C4 84 C5 85 and DO 90 to D6 96 7 4 2 Number of Elements The number of elements is expressed in 2 byte hexadecimal format The range for specifying the number of elements differs for each command Hefer to 7 5 Detailed Description of Services 7 4 3 Communications Data Setting monitor value Communications data Negative values Decimal point See note Hexadecimal 2 bytes 2 s complement The decimal point is removed and the result is converted to hexadecimal Example 105 0 gt 1050 gt 041A Note Refer to Parameter List on page 221 183 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 7 5 Detailed Description of Services 7 5 1 Multiple Read from Variable Area Command Response 184 This service reads data from the variable area Function code Slave Read start No of CRC 16 address address elements H 03 1 1 2 2 2 Function code HE Slave Byte Read data 1 Read data n CRC 16 address count H 03 ME 1 1 1 Number of 2 elements x 2 bytes 1 Read Start Address Refer to Parameter List on page 221 2 No of Elements Specify the number of elements to read The specification range is from H 0001 to H 0050 1 to 80
44. 0 0 to 400 0 1000 NUM e 0106 GSZAT CH7Slope H 00000000 to H 00000FA0 0 0 to 400 0 1000 NUM le 0107 G3ZA1 CH8Slpe H 0000000010 H OO000FAO 0 0 to 400 0 1000 NUM je 0108 G3ZA1 CHIOfset H FFFFFOGOtoH O0000FAO 400 010400 0 0 0 NUM e 0109 G3ZA1 CH2Ofset H FFFFFOGOtoH O0000FAO 400 010400 0 0 0 NUM e 010A G3ZAT CHGOfset WFFFFFOGOtoH 00000FAO 400 0t0400 0 00 NUM e 0108 G3ZA1 CH4Ofset H FFFFFOGOto H 00000FA0 400 0 to 400 0 OO NUM e 010C GSZAT CHsOfset H FFFFFOGOtoH OO000FAO 400 010 400 0 oo NUM le 010D G3ZA1 CH6 Offset H FFFFFOGOtoH O0000FAO 400 010400 0 0 0 NUM e NM je pec ON CO ES NOM je 61 NM Je NM je NM je per CAEN o om om o fore GSi oHrOfser M FFFFFO60 to H 00000FAD 400 0104000 00 ior GSi cHBOfser H FFFFFO60 to H 00000FAD 4000194000 o0 NUM e oro GSZi OHiScucsChams 00000001 to 00000008 119 8 ori GSZi GHzScuceChame H 00000001 to H 00000008 7108 2 fort2 GSZAi CHS Source Channel H 00000001 to H 0000008 7108 forts GSZi CMAScuceChame H 00000001 to H 00000008 7
45. 0 EU BANK e foro 0280 Bank Alarm Value 2 CH1 H FEFFFBS1 to H 0000270F 199910 9099 See note 1 Jo EU BANK e OTT 0281 Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 CHT FFFFFGGI to H 0000270F 199910 9899 See note 1 0 EU BANK e rz 0282 Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 CH1 W FFFFF8S1 to 0000270F C1999 to 6998 Ses note 1 0 EU Bank o forts 0288 Bank Alarm Value S CHT H FFEFFB81 t0 H 0000270F 199910 9099 See note 1 0 EU BANK fe 014 0284 Bank 3 Alarm Upper Limit Value 3 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199910 9999 See note 1 0 eu Bank e H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK Not used 0200 04A0 Bank 3 Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as chamnel 1 EE Bank 3 Set Point CH3 BEEN ERI Bank 3 Set Point CH4 CEIM Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit No Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 D4 Can be 0100 02C0 Present Bank Set Point CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 94 Sune 0101 02C1 Present Bank Proportional Band CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 1 to 9999 See note 2 8 0 EU BANK e operation 0102 02C2 Present Bank Integral Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 0 to 3999 BANK 0103 02C3 Present Bank Derivative Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 BANK 0104 02C4 Present Bank SP Ramp R
46. 0 to 105 0 for standard control Channel 105 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling control Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control The order of priority is as follows Manual MV gt MV at Stop gt MV at PV Error B MV Limiter This function limits the MV output by applying upper and lower limits to the calculated MV e The following MVs take priority over the MV limits e Manual MV e MV at Stop e MV at PV Error Output 100 Y MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit Output Mode Selection Standard control For heating cooling control upper and lower limits are set on overall heat ing cooling control They cannot be set separately for heating and cooling 75 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Output l Heating Cooling MV Lower Limit MV Upper Limit Output Mode Selection Heating cooling control Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default D5 95 MV Upper Limit Channel 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 0 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling control 96 MV Lower Limit Channel 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 105 0 to 0 0 Hor heating cooling ae Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control Note Set the limits so that the MV Upper Limit gt MV Lower Limit If the MV Lower Limit gt MV Upper Limit the larger value will function as the MV Upper Limit 4 3 8 Tuning Autotu
47. 3 1 Connect the G3ZA to a Basic Unit Up to eight G3ZA Units can be connect ed to one Basic Unit If more than eight Units are connected a configura tion error will occur 2 Turn ON pin 7 of SW2 on the Basic Unit set SW2 on the G3ZA to 3 57 6 kbps and set SW1 on the G3ZA to between 0 and 15 unit number The unit number of the G3ZA determines the MV sent from the Basic Unit For details refer to Sending MVs to the G3ZA on page 106 3 Turn ON the power supply to the Basic Unit and execute a Register Unit Configuration Reset operation command No G3ZA Units are registered in the default Basic Unit settings 4 Turn OFF the power supply to the Basic Unit and then turn ON the power supply in the following order G3ZA Units and then the Basic Unit When the Basic Unit starts it will automatically scan for connected G3ZA Units 5 Checkthe Configuration Error A Status to see if any errors have occurred If there are no errors execute a Register Unit Configuration Register op eration command Always execute this command If the configuration is not registered correctly and the configuration cannot be recognized correctly unexpected outputs may occur from the G3ZA Power Controllers for the outputs from the Basic Units 104 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Connection Example Settings Section 4 7 When the EJ1 starts it scans the connected G3ZA Power Controllers and automatically assigns names G3ZA1 G3ZA2 etc in order
48. 4 digits converted to hexadecimal Example 105 0 gt 1050 gt 00000414 8 digits 105 0 1050 041A 4 digits Note Refer to Parameter List on page 221 6 3 5 List of FINS mini Command Services For details on each service refer to 6 4 Detailed Description of Services IMRC SRC Nameofservice Processing TCATC2 HrU 01 01 Read from variable Reads a set value Supported Supported area 01 02 Write to variable Writes a set value Supported Supported area 01 04 Composite read Reads more than one non con Supported Supported from variable area secutive set value 01 13 Composite write to Writes more than one non con Supported Supported variable area secutive set value 01 10 Composite registra Reads in order the contents of Supported Supported tion read addresses specified for compos ite read registration of set val ues Composite read reg Specifies the addresses to be m Bui istration read for a composite read of set values Composite read reg Reads the contents of the regis a istration confirma tration for composite read of set tion values 05 03 Controller attribute Reads the model and communi Supported Supported read cations buffer size 01 Controller status Reads the operating status Supported Supported read 01 Echoback test Performs an echoback test Supported Supported LN com Executes RUN STOP AT exe Supported Supported mands cute AT cancel and other op
49. 5 4 Heater Overcurrent Alarm OC Alarm A heater overcurrent is detected by measuring the heater current while the control output heating is ON For details refer to the following table Heater overcurrent detection cannot be used with the control output for cool ing Control output heating Power to heater Normal See note T Heater overcurrent ON time See note 2 OFF time E i 3 ON Control output heating OFF Note 1 In the above diagram it is considered normal if the heater current is less than the heater overcurrent detection current When an excessive current flows in the heater the current will exceed the heater overcurrent detec tion value and a heater OC Alarm will be output 2 Heater overcurrents are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less Detection is also sometimes not possible if a con tactor is used for the control output Variable type Setting monitoring range D6 96 Heater Overcurrent 1 or 0 0 OC Alarm ON 100 0 See note 3 2 Detection I O 0 1 to 99 9 A 100 0 OC Alarm OFF E4 A4 Heater Overcurrent 1 or 0 1 to 100 0 A 0 1 See note 4 2 Hysteresis 1 0 C5 85 Heater Current Value 1 or 0 0 to 110 0A 2 Monitor 1 0 Conditions for use There must be a CT input 96 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 3 The OC Alarm can be forced ON or OFF regardless of the actual heater current value by setting the OC Heater O
50. 60 40 20 Hl A OFF Control period Note Control responsiveness improves as the control period is short ened but if relays are being used for heater control the relay life time will also be shortened so we recommend using a control period of at least 20 seconds Variable type Setting range Default E1 A1 Control Period 1 to 4 1 0 O to 99 s 2 Conditions for use Control output must be assigned and set to 2 PID control These parameters are not valid for outputs 1 and 2 on Con trollers with linear outputs Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped If the parameter is set to O the period will be 0 5 s 4 2 3 Output ON Scheduling Function The ON time for each output can be reduced to one half or one fourth of the control period to limit the number of outputs in the Unit that are ON simulta neously Method simultaneously See note Note When the MV is assigned to an output the actual limit is either this value or the MV limit value whichever is lower Variable type Setting range Default FO BO Output ON Scheduling 0 No offset Method Common 1 1 2 2 1 4 invalid for TC2 Delay between Outputs O to 1000 ms 10 Common See note 2 Conditions for use Control output must be assigned and set to standard control 2 PID control A Controller with pulse outputs must be used Note 1 When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes eff
51. 61 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 Parameter Default Output Scaling Upper Limit Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 62 Decimal Point C1 Transfer output mA AN cU Process value C 0 300 0 500 0 Reverse scaling can also be performed with output scaling Transfer output mA Reverse scaling 4 a gt Transfer output heating 0 100 Output Scaling Output Scaling Upper Limit Lower Limit Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 4 3 Setting Control Specifications 4 3 1 Starting and Stopping Control E Start Control RUN and Stop Control STOP The following two methods can be used to start stop control For details refer to the corresponding pages 1 Starting stopping control with an operation command 6 4 11 Operation Commands 2 Starting stopping control with an event input 4 7 2 Event Inputs TC2 E Operation After Power ON The operation after power goes ON can be set to Continue Stop or Manual mode operation This setting also applies to operation after a software reset Variable type Setting range Default Operation After Power ON 0 Continue Common 4 Stop 2 Manual Mode Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power
52. A Normal End is returned when Automatic Mode is executed when al ready in automatic mode or Manual Mode is executed when already in manual mode e Switching to Manual Mode during Execution of AT If AT is being executed AT is canceled and the mode switched to man ual mode e 40 AT Execute Cancel and 100 AT Execute Cancel Selects executing or canceling autotuning for the channels specified in the related information An operation error is generated in the following instances e When the run stop parameter is set to stop e When the auto manual parameter is set to manual e During ON OFF control e When 100 AT Execute is specified during 40 AT Execute execu tion e When 40 AT Execute is specified during 100 AT Execute execu tion e Bank O Change to Bank 3 Change Switches between banks 0 to 3 Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks An operation error will occur if autotuning is already being performed for a specified channel 173 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 e LSP Change and RSP Change Sets SP Mode LSP local SP RSP remote SP An operation error will occur if autotuning is already being performed for a specified channel e Reset Error Clears the following errors heater burnout latch HS alarm latch heater overcurrent latch heater overcurrent and operation during error selec tion B e Alarm Latch Cancel Cancels alarm latches This command is enabled
53. Absolute value upper limit with standby sequence Absolute value lower limit with standby sequence m Absolute value lower limit LBA Loop Burnout Alarm Note 1 With set values 1 4 and 5 the upper and lower limit values can be set independently for each alarm type and are expressed as L and H 2 Set value 1 Upper and lower limit alarm Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always ON mel ei lt lt L H SP SP L H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 H lt 0 L gt 0 IH lt L HI ILI H LSP Li m o SPH L H lt L 3 Set value 4 Upper and lower limit range Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Always OFF H 0 L 0 L H SP SPL H H SP L H lt 0 L gt 0 H gt 0 L lt 0 A H lt 0 L gt 0 H lt L H gt L H LSP H gt L uq H gt 0L lt 0 SPH L IH xI L 82 Setting Alarm Specifications Section 4 4 4 Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence Note For the above upper and lower limit alarm e n cases 1 and 2 above the alarm is always OFF if the hystere sis overlaps the upper and lower limits e n case 3 the alarm is always OFF b Set value 5 Upper and lower limit with standby sequence e The alarm is always OFF when the hysteresis overlaps the up per and lower limits 4 4 2 Alarm Value Alarm values are indicated by X in the table on the previous page When the upper and lower limits are set independently H is displayed for upper limit values and L is displayed for lower limit values
54. Communications Section 5 1 e RS 485 MELSEC An AnS FX3UC series PLC EJ1N HFUL NFLK RS 485 Shield INN RS 485 ASADAS elf noise immunity is a problem in communications connect terminating resistance of 110 to 125 O to pins 6 and 7 of port B on the EDU 2 Make the PLC settings When using an An AnS series PLC use the switches on the front of the Computer Link Unit to make the settings shown in the following table Switch J Setting Station setting OO Stop bits Write during RUN Allowed Computer link multidrop link Computer link See note 1 19 2 bps Note 1 This setting is not used on the A1SJ71UC24 R2 or A15J71UC24 PRE 2 If any other settings are used change the setting for the EJ1 to the same settings 3 Refer to the user s manual for the PLC for setting methods 121 Programless Communications Section 5 1 122 Note Contents monitor value D00000 Read Response Bits D00001 Setting Change Response Bits If using an FX3UC series PLC use the GX Developer to make the commu nications settings Start the GX Developer double click PLC Parameter under Parameter in the project tree click the PLC System Setting 2 Tab select the channel to use select the option to set communications and then make the follow ing settings A E Parity Even Stop bit H W type When using RS 232C Normal RS 232C Checksum Transmission control procedure defau
55. H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to See note 1 gt lO EU BANK e H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK e H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK Not used 0200 0460 Bank 1 Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as chamnel 1 Ean 0300 Bank 1 Set Point CH3 MENU a a l l 0400 Bank 1 Set Point CH4 EE nm y Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range pie Category Add Address as ype ress Ed D2 92 0100 0280 BankzSstFon CHi N FFFFFESIIGH ODDZOF 1998 10 0000 See roe 1 0 FU BANK e nas esr Bai Progr CH OOOO OO ia ana emm so JEU sek operation 0102 0282 Bank2integalTme CH H 00000000 to H 00000FaF 103889 ms s BAK e os 0283 BankzDeraiveTime CHi H 00000000 to H 0000270F 001099897 409 s BANK e 0104 0284 Bank 2 SP Ramp Rise Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 5999 note 1 EU sor BANK Function stops when set to O EU min 0105 0285 Bank 2 SP Ramp Fall Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to 0 EU min Not used 0107 0287 Bank 2 Manual Reset Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 BANK 0108 0288 Bank 2 Cooling Coefficient CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 to 99 99 11 00 BANK 0109 0289 Bank 2 Dead Band CH1 H FFFF
56. HFU Section 5 Advanced Unit HFU Functions describes the functions of EJ1 Advanced Unit e Operation Using Communications Section 6 Communications CompoWay F and Section 7 Communications Modbus describes how to use communications based on communications commands e Troubleshooting Section 8 Troubleshooting describes methods for checking possible problems in operation depend ing on classifications of Temperature Controller status e Specifications and Parameter Lists Appendix provides specifications parameter lists status lists and other reference information NWARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per sonal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given xxl Functional Upgrades xxii EJ1 Temperature Controllers with linear outputs EJ1N TC2A CNB and EJ1N TC2B CNB have been added and the functions of the previous EJ1 Controllers with pulse outputs have been improved Infor mation in this manual related to improved functionality is indicated with this mark MARI The improved functionality is outlined below e Basic Units TC4 TC2 e Modbus communications can be used on port B e Software version 2 of the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller can be used No
57. Local SP Sets the selected bank s set point Remote SP Sets the process value of the channel specified as the remote SP input Internal SP This is the set point actually set for use in control Variable type Parameter name Setting monitoring range FO BO Remote SP Enable Common 0 Disabled See note 1 1 Enabled C4 84 Local SP Monitor Channel 1999 to 9999 EU See note 3 Hemote SP Monitor 1999 to 9999 EU See note 2 Channel See note 3 Conditions for use No special conditions Note 1 When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON 2 The remote SP function can be used for channel 1 or channel 2 for the TCA but only for channel 1 for the TC2 3 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection N Caution e f autotuning starts during remote SP operation autotuning will be executed with the SP that existed when autotuning started After autotuning is com pleted control will start based on the remote SP value e he remote SP cannot be used as a reset condition for a standby sequence e Effective Range of the Remote SP The following diagram shows the internal SP that will actually be used in control if the remote SP s range is wider than the input range or SP limiter range 72 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Note Switching between the Remote SP and
58. MV at PV Error or Stop control An error has occurred in commu Check the connection to the G3ZA and take nications with a connected appropriate measures G3ZA One of the following alarms has Read the Error Channel A Status the Channel occurred heater burnout alarm Status and the Channel Alarm Status to deter heater short alarm or heater mine the channel with the alarm and the nature overcurrent alarm of the alarm and take appropriate measures 193 Determining Errors from Indicators HF Section 8 2 tas JO Possible causes Countermeasure Hed lit 194 The power supply to the PLC was interrupted after communi cations were established between the PLC and EJ1 The communications cable was broken after communications were established between the PLC and EJ1 Parameters for a Unit that does not exist were registered in the Programless Upload Settings or Programless Download Settings of the HFU An error has occurred in pro gramless communications An illegal operation command code was written to the program less download area in the PLC Supply power to the PLC If the Operation Command Response Bits in the Programless Upload Area set in PLC memory are EEEE write FFFF to the Operation Com mand Request Bits to restart communications Connect the cable If the Operation Command Response Bits in the Programless Upload Area set in PLC memory are EEEE write FFFF to the Ope
59. No RS control of RD continual reception ON RS control of SD 47 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices Section 3 4 3 4 3 Setup The settings are made through communications The EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software can be connected using an E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable to set the parameters from a personal computer The following table shows the parameters related to the G3ZA that can be set from the Temperature Controller as well as example settings Variable type Set value Note 3 4 4 Adjustment 48 0100 GGZA G3ZA Unit number 02 Same as G3ZA Unit number 01 e The Programmable Terminal and E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable cannot be connected at the same time e When connecting the cable for the Support Software to an EJ1C EDU End Unit either turn OFF the Programmable Terminal s power supply or switch the Programmable Terminal s screen to the system menu Execute autotuning AT to make the PID adjustments Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning for details Set the slope and offset values independently to match the system The default value for the slope is 100 096 and the default value for the offset is 0 0 SECTION 4 Basic Units TC4 and TC2 Functions This section describes the functions of EJ1 Basic Units 4 1 Setting Input Specifications tica S ERU rA Gua 51 delei A A 51 Aol Temperature IMputs stare 52 4 1 3 Analog Inputs 3 24 3 04082 ane oad ed hha hd Sew hee OSes 52
60. OFF time ON time See note 2 ON Control output heating OFF Note 1 In the above diagram power is considered to be OFF normal if the leak age current is less than the HS alarm current during the OFF time If the SSR output is short circuited the measured current will increase beyond the HS alarm value and an HS Alarm will be output 2 HS alarms are not detected if the control output heating OFF time is 100 ms or less Detection is also sometimes not possible if a contactor is used for the control output Variable type Parameter name Setting monitoring range D6 96 HS Alarm 1 or 2 I O 0 0 HS Alarm ON 100 0 See note 3 0 1 to 99 9 A 100 0 HS Alarm OFF E4 A4 HS Alarm 1 or 2 Hysteresis 0 1 to 100 0 A 0 1 See note 4 1 0 Leakage Current Value 1 or 0 0to 110 0 A 2 Monitor 1 0 Conditions for use There must be a CT input 3 The HS Alarm can be forced ON or OFF regardless of the actual leakage current value by setting the HS Alarm parameter to 0 0 or 100 0 Use the 0 0 and 100 0 settings to check operation 4 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped The hysteresis setting prevents chattering at the detection point When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON e Control will be continued even when there is an HS Alarm e The rated current value may sometime
61. RAM Data See nole 1 87 AmsFR O ParameterIniizaion 38 aways O o Save RAM Data 2 See note 2 39 Aways OC o Register Unit Configuration 00 Reset 01 Register 172 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 Note 1 Set values that can be changed during operation are saved to EEPROM 2 All set values are saved to EEPROM m Description of Operation Commands and Precautions e Write Mode Set either the Port B backup mode or RAM write mode using the related information The default is RAM write mode When the mode is switched from RAM write mode to backup mode the settings for the parameters that can be changed during operation are not written to EEPROM Execute the Save RAM Data command if required Note Settings that are changed from port A are always written to EEPROM Be sure to consider the limit to the number of writes when using port A e Software Reset Executes a software reset A software reset performs the same operation as when the power is cycled Execute a software reset only when control operations are stopped for all channels e RUN STOP Starts or stops operation for the channels specified in the related informa tion e Auto manual Switch Switches between manual mode and automatic mode for the channels specified in the related information When switching from automatic to manual mode the MV will be written to EEPROM An operation error is generated in the following instances e ON OFF control
62. RS 422A Converter RS 485 EJ Connection port Connection port PP oe PLC ES EJ1 Port A EDU No Communications Between the EJ1 and the NS Series PT Using Serial Connection Staus o Possible cause Countermeasure There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the EJ1 supply terminal The SAP is not compatible Use a SAP for the EJ1 with the EJ1 The SAP is not for serial con Use a SAP for serial Programmable nection Terminal connection An E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable is con nected to port A and the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software is started The Serial Communications Board SCB Unit SCU and the EJ1 communications set tings do not match The EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Sup port Software and Programmable Terminals cannot be used at the same time Close the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software if using Program mable Terminals To temporarily use the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software either turn OFF the Programmable Terminal or move the Programmable Terminal to the System Screen and stop Pro grammable Terminal communica tions Correct the communications settings for the Serial Communications Unit User default settings User settings Serial communications mode Serial Gateway Data length 7 bit Stop bits 2 bit Parity Even bit Baud rate 38 4 kbps Refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manua
63. Status m Example Example 1 Switch all channels between Run and Stop according to the ON OFF status of the event input Outputs the ON OFF status Switches between Run Stop based of the event input on the bus ON OFF status ENT A Model Parametername Set Value Bus Output 3 Assignment Event input 1 Bus Input 3 Assignment All channels Run 0 Stop 1 Bus Input 3 Assignment All channels Run 0 Stop 1 HFU TC2 TC4 EDU Example 2 Switch all channel banks according to the ON OFF status of the event input Outputs the ON OFF status Switches banks based on of the event input the bus ON OFF status EV1 EV2 Modei Parameter name SetVaue i i Bus Input 2 Assignment Bank for all channels bit 1 Bus Output 1 Assignment Disabled Bus Output 2 Assignment Disabled HFU TC4 TC4 EDU Note When assigning bus I O disable all bus I O assignments first and then make the settings 154 SECTION 6 CompoWay F Communications This section describes how to use communications based on communications commands 6 1 Communications Settings iex brad Ad A a eiua 156 6 1 1 Communications Specifications oooooooooooooooooooooo 156 6 2 Unit Number sets cialis ta aa dede 157 6 1 3 Other Communications Settid8S o ooooooooooooooooooo 157 61 4 Send Data Walt Time usos ocenta E SY doeny needed 157 6 2 Fr
64. Structure Command Text Response Text 6 3 2 6 3 3 160 Note The structure of the FINS mini command text and FINS mini response text are described below An MRC main request code and SRC sub request code followed by the various required data is transferred in the command frame Service Response PDU MRC SRC Data The MRES main response code and SRES sub response code are trans ferred in the response frame following the above MRC SRC Data is then transferred following the MRES and SRES Service Response PDU Normal Response Response code Service Response PDU FINS mini Command Text Not Executed Response code MRC SRC MRES SRES If the specified FINS mini command text could not be executed only the MRC SRC and MRES SRES are used in the target response PDUs The MRES and SRES are used in the response code when processing did not end in a normal completion Variable Type and Address Note Refer to Parameter List on page 221 Number of Elements The number of elements is expressed in 2 byte hexadecimal format The range for specifying the number of elements differs for each command Hefer to 6 4 Detailed Description of Services FINS mini Text Section 6 3 6 3 4 Communications Data Setting monitor value Communications data Negative values Decimal point See note Hexadecimal Double word 8 digits 2 s complement The decimal point is removed and the result is Word
65. Upper Limit the larger value will function as the SP Upper Limit In addition if the limit range is set outside of the input range it will be limited to the input range The SP will not be changed automatically even if the input type or SP Limiter is changed Although the SP will not be changed automatically the internal SP used for control will be limited to the input range or SP Limiter whichever range is narrower 69 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Input range SP Limiter range When the input type is changed the input range is narrowed Input range SP Limiter range Note The SP is not changed but the internal SP used for control is lim ited by the upper limit of the input range m SP Setting Example The internal SP which is actually used for control is limited by the input range and SP Limiter range Actual SP setting range A Input range Set Point Limiter Internal SP 4 3 5 Setting the SP Ramp 70 The SP ramp function restricts the width of changes in the set point as a rate of change When the SP ramp function is enabled and the change width exceeds the specified rate of change this function can restrict the set point within an area as shown in the following diagram While the SP ramp function is operating control will be performed not for the specified set point but rather for the set point restricted by the rate of change set for the SP ramp function SP
66. a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON 2 Refer to Parameter List on page 221 for details on parameter settings 5 3 2 HFU Internal Buses The EJ1 has three internal device buses l O allocations can be made for these buses which enables simple sequencing to be incorporated by allocat ing output signals to buses bus output assignments and determining opera tions based on bus status bus input assignments Note Bus inputs cannot be used if a Basic Unit is used without an HFU Even if an HFU is used bus inputs cannot be used for Basic Units connected to the RS 485 communications lines using distributed positioning 152 Other HFU Functions Section 5 3 Set using bus output assignments Set using bus output assignments Set using auxiliary output assignments Set using bus input assignments SUB1 HFU TC2 TC4 EDU Note 1 BUS1 and BUS2 are connected to SUB1 and SUB2 on the EDU 2 HFU event inputs and auxiliary outputs can be linked 3 Information output to buses can be accessed by the outputting Unit Bus Output The parameters that can be set for bus output assignments are outlined Assignment Settings below Refer to the following examples when setting parameters Note Make correct bus settings for each Unit making sure the settings match oper ations in the EJ1 system ll HFU Bus Output Assignments e he stat
67. be confirmed EEPROM EEPROM in EEPROM Bio Notuwed O S Bit Notused 0 qoo ooo Bit12 Notused o ooo oo Bi13 DOTE E qo oo ooo EXT Bit18 Notused ooo S 251 Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications Appendix Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications The following table lists the parameters that can be allocated to programless communications Function Paramor atribute Upload Download Remaks Device Enor Status ome le eenoe Wontrngony Configuration Ear A saus Commn e Seenoe Wontngoiy CmfewalontmrBSuus Common e See note Monitoring oy memaCommucslonsEmorSus O Commo e eeroe Wontrngony O Enor Status Come eeroe Wontrngony O Alarm A taras O Ommo e Senate Monitoring OMY IONamBSus O O O oO Commn e eeroe Wontnpoy ONoWcmonASuus O O Commo e eenoe Wontrngoy Error OhamelA Status foomo Senate Monitoring OMY BescUnWEwendUntEmr Commo e eeroe Wontrngony BescUnWbwandUntAam ommo e Seenote Monitoring oy Op Stats Cone GSeenoe Montngoiy DweeBSaus Comme eeroe Wontrngony Leakage Curent Value Moor Jo je Sonate Monitoring Only Heater Current Value 2 mono D fe iseen Motigo emageCumemVaue2 Monitor O fe sente Montoingony fHeaterBumout1Detesion a fe fe o CI 0 CI ewerOwmweniDwwkn A
68. because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY In no event
69. burnout 10 A x E x EJ PE 5A 5A With this configuration the heater burnout detection current is as follows Heater burnout detection current pete E 5 4 A 93 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 c V Connection Example Using Two 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal Operation To CT input Load Heater example To CT input Heater Burnout Occurred 5A 200 V To CT input To CT input 200 V 200 V Load Heater example Load Heater 200 v Burnout example 5 A gt Burnout To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout 10 A x gt Current when there is a burnout 0 A D A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the common is as fol lows 10 5 Heater burnout detection current 2 7 5 A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows Heater burnout detection current nr 5 A To enable detection in either case use 7 5 A as the heater burnout detection current 4 5 3 Heater Short Alarm HS Alarm The HS Alarm detection function measures the heater current when the con trol output heating is OFF For details refer to the following table HS Alarm detection cannot be used with the control output for cooling Control output heating Power to heater HS Alarm output Yes HS alarm occurred No Normal See note 1 94 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5
70. configuration and allow sufficient margin when setting the response wait time Communications will not be normal if this setting is too short Variable type Setting range Default FO BO Programless Communications 10 to 2000 Receive Wait Time Common 10000 ms Conditions for use The Programless Communications Protocol cannot be NT Link 1 N Note Reset the EJ1 to enable the setting Operation for Error in Either continuing or stopping operation can be selected for when errors occur Programless Link in the programless link Variable type Setting range Defauit FO BO Selection of Programless Communi 0 Continue 1 cations Operation during Error 1 Stop Common Conditions for use No special conditions Note Reset the EJ1 to enable the setting Setting range range Operation 0 Continue Programless communications will be restarted automatically when the cause of the programless link error has been removed and communications are possible with the PLC 1 Stop Read write operations for PLC memory will not be performed even after the cause of the programless link error has been removed and communications are possible with the PLC Instead EEEE will be set in the Operation Command Response Bits Refer to Method for Canceling Communications Errors on page 144 for information on clearing the error PLC Settings SYSMAC CS CJ Series The settings are the same as made when checking operation Refer to Check i
71. default settings data registers in the PLC are allocated to the EJ1 monitor and set values as shown in the following table If the allocated words shown below are already in use change the words referring to Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area Variable Type FO BO on page 126 and to Programless Communications Upload Download Start Address Variable Type FO BO on page 126 Data register Contents monitor value Data register Contents set value DO Read Response Bits D1000 Read Request Bits Setting Change Response Bits D1001 Setting Change Request Bits Operation Command Response Bits D1002 Operation Command Request Bits Communications Status D1003 Operation Command Code Monitor Value A D1004 Set Value A 117 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Data register Contents monitor value Monitor Value B Data register Contents set value D1005 Set Value B 4 Check operation Turn OFF the power to the EJ1 and PLC and then turn the power back ON It does not matter which one is turned ON first Refer to the following infor mation and check the operation Basic Operations 11 E Monitoring EJ1 Set Values Use the following procedure to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 pro cess values can be read 1 2 3 1 Setthe Read Request Bits allocated in PLC memory D1000 to 2 2 Confirm that the Read Response Bits DO are set to 2 3 Confirm that D4 and D5 are set to the channel 1 a
72. details on installation methods refer to the users manual for the E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable 3 Connect the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software to set the com munications protocol Select Communications Settings and set the following communications parameters Serial port COM See note 1 E58 CIFQ1 Serial Port Baud rate 38400 Parity Unit number Seenoie2 1 The serial port COM port number depends on the computer s settings 2 Verify the unit number which is set with switches SW1 and SW2 on the EJ1 s front panel 35 Minimum Configuration for Control Section 3 1 4 The following table shows the related parameter settings for this example CX Thermo Beginner Mode Setting Example A ea Remarks EJ1N TC2A QNHB 0 Control in progress parameters BaxONamWiei OHi 0G o Bank OAlarmVaue2 CH oce Poo Adjustment settings Manual MV CH1 Disabled in Auto mode HB HS OC settings 1 Heater Burnout 1 Detection HB alarm OFF Heater Burnout 2 Detection HB alarm OFF Control stopped parameters Input settings Input Type CH1 5 Thermocouple K IEEE Output settings Control Period 1 OUT control period 2 s Alarm settings Alarm 1 Type CH1 2 Upper limit alarm Alarm 2 Type CH1 2 Upper limit alarm A IO PA Operation commands Auto CH1 100 AT Execute CH1 AT Cancel CH1 36 Minimum Configuration for Control Section 3 1 3 1 4 Adjustment
73. error 1 HFU 0 H 00000002 All channels All alarm OR 2 H 00000003 All channels All alarm AND 3 H 00000004 All channels Alarm 1 OR 4 H 00000005 All channels Alarm 2 OR 5 H 00000006 All channels Alarm 3 OR 6 H 00000007 All channels Alarm 1 AND 7 H 00000008 All channels Alarm 2 AND 8 H 00000009 All channels Alarm 3 AND 9 H 00000004 All channels Input error OR 10 H 0000000B All channels RSP Input error OR 11 Not used H 0000000D All channels HB Heater Burnout alarm OR 13 H 0000000E All channels HS Heater Short alarm OR 14 Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name type Category Add Address ress F2 B2 Enabled Not used after resetting 14 H 0000000F All channels OC Heater Overcurrent alarm OR 15 H 00000010 Event input 1 16 H 0000001 1 Event input 2 17 H 00000012 Event input 3 18 H 00000013 Event input 4 19 H 00000014 Bus input 1 20 H 00000015 Bus input 2 21 H 00000016 Bus input 3 22 Not used H 00000020 CH1 Alarm 1 32 H 00000021 CH1 Alarm 2 33 H 00000022 CH1 Alarm 3 34 H 00000023 CH1 All alarm OR 35 H 00000024 CH1 All alarm AND 36 H 00000025 CH1 Input error 37 H 00000026 CH1 RSP Input error 38 Not used H 00000028 CH1 HB Heater Burnout alarm 40 H 00000029 CH1 HS Heater Short alarm 41 H 0000002A CH1 OC Heater Overcurrent alarm 42 Not us
74. imagines on NS series PTs using a Programmable Terminals RGB and Video Input Unit Opera NS series RGB and Video Input Unit including the tion Manual following information e Features system configuration and specifica tions e Functions setting methods and adjustment methods Smart Active Parts Reference Manual Describes the Smart Active Parts SAP function ality and the settings required to use the SAP library This document does not describe applica tion restrictions for specific Units or Components or restrictions in combinations Always refer to the operation manual for the products involved before using the SAP library XV B mias sadi Software Manuals CXONE Onon aes s s s s o EV2 ALI Il ID EV2 W463 Installation and overview of CX One FA Integrated CX One Ver 2 0 FA Integrated Tool Package Setup Manual Tool Package CXONE ALLILIC EV2 CKONE ALLILID EV2 W464 Describes operating procedures for the CX Inte CX Integrator Ver 2 0 Operation Manual grator Network Configuration Tool for CS CJ CP and NSJ series Controllers SYSMAC WS02 CXPC1 E V70 W446 Provides information on how to use the CX Pro CX Programmer Operation Manual grammer for all functionality except for function blocks SYSMAC WS02 CXPC1 E V7 Describes the functionality unique to the CX Pro CX Programmer Ver 7 0 Operation Manual grammer Ver 7 0 and CP series CPU Units or CS Function Blocks CJ series CPU Units with unit version 3 0 or late
75. is changing Bit 15 repeatedly turns ON OFF during commu nications Bit 15 alternates between ON and OFF changing at each program less communications Example Multi Read Each time all the parameters set under Programless Upload Settings are written to the PLC bit 15 changes between ON and OFF To change EJ1 settings from the PLC first change the values in the Download Area in the PLC memory and then set the Setting Change Request Bits The EJ1 will then read the Download Area in the PLC memory and change the corresponding settings e Single Action Any parameters in the download area settings that have changed from the previous values are written 4 The EJ1 sets the Setting Change Response Bits EJ1 Upload Area 9 Download Area Address Value Value HFU Tea m 0 m 1 m 2 m 3 4 PLC Read Response Operation Command as Operation Command Hesponse Bits Request Bits Communications hs Status n 4 us po Upload Area Download Area E di Read Request Bits mo Operatio nao Operation Command Response E Request Bits Communica Operation Monitor VaueN md yyyy i i Read Request Bits 0001 2 The Setting Change Request Bits are set by the PLC yvy Operation Command Code ll I 1 Set value is changed by 3 The EJ1 reads the the PLC set value 5 The Setting Change Request Bits are cleared by the PLC 6 The EJ1 clears the Setting Change Response Bits Prog
76. is the smaller of the send and receive buffer sizes 3 Response Codes Response code Error name Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long 1 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error MN Operation error 7015 The command cannot be executed while resetting including during star tup 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 169 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 9 Controller Status Read This service reads the operating status and error status E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC 0 6 0 11 2 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Operating Related code status Informa 0 6 0 1 tion 2 2 4 2 2 1 Operating Status e TC4 TC2 Channel Bit position Meaning 00 Operating 01 Error output 10 Stopped 11 In manual operation e HFU Fixed to 00 2 Related Status TC4 and TC2 HR o Startup processing COS E O 06 3 Response Codes Response code Errormame Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 170 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 10 Echoback Test This service performs an echoback test E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Testdaia 018 011 2 2 0 to 323 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code Test data 018 0 11 LLL LLL LL 2 2 4 0 t
77. item 0 D00000 0000 Read Response Bits AN D00001 0001 Setting Change Response Bits Step 3 Set to 0001 by the system 0001 Doroo1 0001 Seting Change Request Bis Step 2 Set from PLC user progam Operation Command Request Bits Doi003 0000 Operation Command Ode D01005 0064 Channel 2 Set Point Step 1 Set from PLC user program B If Not Operating Correctly Check the following items if the operation is incorrect Are the wiring and settings correct e Was the power cycled once the EJ1 and PLC settings were completed The EJ1 settings are enabled only after the EJ1 is reset Checking Operation This section describes how to check operation for the configuration shown with the MELSEC Q below QnA QnAS Series Ed MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC HFU TC EDU E O RS 232C 422 1 2 3 1 Connect the EJ1 and PLC Connect the EJ1N HFU and Serial Communications Unit as shown in the following diagram 115 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e RS 232C MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC EJ1N HFULJ NFLK RS 232C aaj o CORE s s0 4 20 UTR sol s 66 DSR 7a as COR Note QnA pin numbers are given in parentheses Turn ON pin 8 of SW2 to set RS 232C e RS 422 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC EJ1N HFULI NFL2 RS 422 one Shield SDA IN FN SDB RDA mp HDB FG MZ BT RDB 209009090 8 8 8 8 8 amp SDB
78. may occur depending on when the master HFU is started If the Selection of Programless Communications Operation during Error parameter is set to continue operation then communications will recover automatically after power is restored Other HFUs Communications will recover automatically after power is restored 151 Other HFU Functions Section 5 3 5 3 Other HFU Functions 5 3 1 Auxiliary Output Allocations The parameters that can be set for auxiliary outputs 1 to 4 are outlined below SUB1 SUB2 SUB3 SUB4 Settable parameters Disabled Temperature Controller Error Event inputs 1 to 4 Bus inputs 1 to 3 SUB2 SUB3 and SUB4 can be set in the same way Temperature The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when any Controller Error bit between bit O and bit 13 is ON in the Device A Status It can be used to output EJ1 error status Refer to Status Lists on page 240 for details on Device A Sta tus Event inputs 1 to 4 Output the ON OFF status of event inputs 1 to 4 Bus inputs 1to3 Output the ON OFF status of bus inputs 1 to 3 Variable type Parametername Soning range Default zz Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment Common Oto 22 0 Conditions for use No special conditions Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next time
79. no condensation or icing To extend the service life of the cud install it in a location with an ambient temperature as low as possible In locations exposed to high temperatures if necessary cool the prod ucts using a fan or other cooling method Vibration and shock Check whether the standards related to shock and vibration are satis fied at the installation environment Install the product in locations where the conductors will not be subject to vibration or shock Foreign particles Install the product in a location that is not subject to liquid or foreign particles entering the product If sulfide chlorine or other corrosive gases are present remove the source of the gas install a fan or use other countermeasures to protect the product xiii Related Manuals The manuals related to the EJ1 are configured as shown in the following tables Refer to these manu als as required i EJ1 C S gt EJ1 H142 Describes the following information on the EJ1 EJ1N TC2 This e Overview and features L manual EJ1N TC4 RANT EJ4N HFUF e Basic specifications EJ1C EDU e System design Modular Temperature Controller User s Manual e System configuration e Mounting and wiring e Maintenance e Troubleshooting CX Thermo Ver 3 1 online help Describes how to set parameters and adjust EST2 2C MV3 devices i e components such as Temperature Controllers using the CX Thermo B CS CJ series PLC Manuals Nam C
80. note Heater Burnout HB Alarm e Heater Short HS Alarm Heater Overcurrent OC Alarm Applies to the channel associated with the CT current transformer For example when the Control Output 1 Assignment is set to Channel 1 Con trol Output Heating and the CT1 Assignment is set to OUT1 channel 1 will operate according to the Operation During Error Selection B setting if a heater burnout is detected at CT1 Associated by the Control Associated by the Output 1 Assignment CT1 Assignment Channel 1 Control T1 T1 Output Heating Uem 2 Since CT1 is associated with channel 1 channel 1 will operate according to the Operation During Error Selection B setting if an error is detected at CT1 81 Setting Alarm Specifications Section 4 4 4 4 Setting Alarm Specifications 4 4 1 Alarm Types Set the alarm type for each of the alarms in Alarm 1 Type Alarm 2 Type and Alarm 3 Type variable type E3 A3 Set value Alarm type Alarm Output Function When alarm value X is positive When alarm value X is negative E Alarm function OFF Output OFF Upper and lower limit See note 2 TR note 1 2 Upper limit Default 3 Lower limit l Nh BE orr M 4 Upper and lower limit range See note 3 See note 1 5 Upper and lower limit alarm with See note 4 See note 1 standby sequence Upper limit alarm with standby sequence Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Absolute value upper limit
81. or not the value being changed can be changed Use the following procedure to clear error values Leo du 1 Set the Response Bits to 0000 stop operation for the Request Bits for which the error value was set 2 Checkthe communications unit number and setting range be sure that the present value can be changed and correct the error 3 Setthe Request Bits again Errors in If noise or other cause results in a communications error with the PLC the Communications with EJ1 will stop programless communications and set the Operation Command PLCs Response Bits to EEEE With version WERE however communications will be stopped only when the Selection of Programless Communications Opera tion during Error parameter is set to 1 stop E Method for Canceling Communications Errors 1 2 3 1 Setthe Operation Command Request Bits to FFFF 2 The Operation Command Response Bits will be set to FFFF and the pro gramless communications will return to the initial status Note f the Read Request Bits or Setting Change Request Bits are set restart operation according to the request 3 Setthe Operation Command Request Bits to 0000 then check that the Op eration Command Response Bits have been set to 0000 Note Operation commands cannot be executed while the Operation Command Response Bits are set to FFFF If the communications line is disconnected or the PLC power supply turns OFF during programless communications a programless communicat
82. or the error is not cleared even after performing the above checks use the communications function to inves tigate in more detail Check the EJ1 status Find the cause of the error based on the data read by the EJ1 then correct the error If the cause of the error is still not clear after checking all these items infer the cause from the current situation and try countermeasures Determining Errors from Indicators Section 8 2 8 2 Determining Errors from Indicators The following table shows indicator status possible error causes and coun termeasures Status Countermeasure PWR Not lit There is no power supply Check to see if the Units are linked properly RUN Not lit The power supply voltage is out Adjust the voltage to within the range ER TA side the allowable range om The Unit is malfunctioning Replace the Unit ALM Not lit PWR Green flashing 0 5 s The Unit is malfunctioning Cycle the power supply If the problem persists replace the Unit RUN ERR 1 Red lit ALM The settings data is corrupted Send the Parameter Initialization operation com PWR ld Green flashing 1 s mand to initialize the parameters and then set RUN Not lit O PISIS MEN m l The Unit configuration informa Send the Register Unit Configuration Reset ERR Red lit tion is corrupted Basic Units operation command and then cycle the EJ1 ALM only power supply The Unit is malfunctioning Repl
83. output heating is output to G3ZA channels 1 to 4 TC4 G3ZA CH1 Control Output Heating Channel 1 MV Operation Channel 1 controlled variable Channel 2 MV Operation Channel 2 controlled variable CH2 Control Output Heating Channel 3 MV Operation Channel 3 controlled variable CH3 Control Output Heating CH4 Control Output Heating Channel 4 MV Operation Channel 4 controlled variable Set with the Source Set with the Slope and Channel parameter Offset parameters G3ZA settings CH1 Source Channel CH2 Source Channel CH3 Source Channel CH4 Source Channel 1 107 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 108 SECTION 5 Advanced Unit HFU Functions This section describes the functions of EJ1 Advanced Unit 5 1 Programless Communications 0 eee el 110 IsL Connecctable DEVICES Lice ene deba t ada se tous 110 5 1 2 Checking Operation 142 399 br RRE EG ora 50084505 111 5 1 3 Detailed Sells o 22244 eeS adr ERE E rada vea TuS 123 5 1 4 Description of Operation 0 0 0 ee 130 5 1 5 Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications 140 5 1 6 Programless Communications Errors 00 00 eee ee 144 5 2 Connecting More Than One HFU WARY 145 5 2 1 SYSMAC CS CJ series PLCs 0 0 0 145 5 2 2 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLCs 0 0 00 00 0000 148 5 9 Other
84. output 3 Event input 1 Control output 4 Event input 2 CT input 1 G3ZA communications CT input 2 Internal bus 1 Internal bus 2 Internal bus 3 e Internal device I O are connected via a connector to the adjacent Unit Port A communications Port B communications Inside the device HFU Advanced Unit umm SEN Port C communications Internal bus 1 Port A communications Internal bus 2 Communications Internal bus 3 between Units Inside the device e Internal device I O are connected via a connector to the adjacent Unit e Communications between devices are connected to TC4 or TC2 host device communications I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 EDU End Unit Note Adjacent Unit Port A communications Port B communications Auxiliary output 1 See note Auxiliary output 2 See note Auxiliary outputs are output via an internal bus 1 2 2 Main Unit Functions Basic Units TC4 and TC2 TC4 TC2 Advanced Unit HFU End Unit EDU e The Basic Units are modular temperature controllers with I O e There are two models of Basic Unit The TC4 with four I O channels and the TC2 with two I O channels e Up to eight G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers can be connected to one Basic Unit e One TC4 Unit controls temperature on 4 channels e Multi input is supported for thermocouple platinum resistance thermome ter or analog input e The type of input can be set sep
85. railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations e Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof vi Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used
86. series CPU Units and Serial Communications Boards Units 112 Programless Communications Section 5 1 2 Make the PLC settings Use the CX Programmer to make the communications port settings for the Serial Communications Unit The settings can be easily made using lO Ta ble and Unit Setup Be sure to transfer the settings to the PLC DM Area Set Board CS Series only Unit CS CJ Series value Srewemer CA 4 sanois Seting not requred 03 Dataiengh Seting not required 02 siopbis Seting not required or Party Seting not required 00 Parity Setingnotrequired D32001 D32011 m 11 Reserved 000AH Note 1 m 2 D30000 100 x Unit No word address 2 When using a communications port on the CPU Unit start the CX Pro grammer and set the Host Link port settings in the PLC Settings as fol lows Mode NT Link 1 N Baud rate 115 200 Be sure to transfer the settings to the PLC 3 The same serial port on the CS CJ series Serial Communications Board Unit cannot be connected to both the EJ1 and an NS series Programma ble Terminal The following settings are also required if the models listed below are used Mode Terminating resistance ON OFF switch 2 wire 4 wire switch CJ1W SCU41 V1 ON 2 CJ1W SCUS1 V1 See note CS1W SCU31 V1 CS1W SCB41 V1 Note The port 2 terminating resistance switch and 2 4 wire switch are on the bot tom of the Unit 3 Set the EJ1 parameters No par
87. shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANT Y REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS HEGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products e Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this manual e Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems
88. start Write data CRC 16 address address H 06 1 1 2 2 2 Function code Slave Write start Write data CRC 16 address address H 06 1 1 2 2 2 1 Write Start Address Set the write start address to H FFFF when executing an operation com mand When writing to the variable area refer to Parameter List on page 221 2 Write Data When executing an operation command place the command code in the upper byte of the write data and place the related information in the lower byte When writing data to the variable area refer to Parameter List on page 221 Operation command TC related information Write Mode 04 00 Backup 01 RAM Software Reset 06 Always 00 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 Operation command TC related information 00 Channel 1 01 Channel 2 Manual 02 Channel 3 OE FF All channels OF 32 00 Channel 1 34 02 Channel 3 All Alarm Latch Cancel 35 03 Channel 4 FF All channels Save RAM Data See note Always FF Register Unit Configuration 3B 00 Reset 01 Register Note Set values that can be changed during operation are saved to EE PROM e Descriptions of and Precautions for Operation Commands Refer to Description of Operation Commands and Precautions on page 173 187 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 3 Response Codes The following response codes are for operation commands For the re sponse codes for writing to the variable area refer to the response codes u
89. the Current Situation for Temperature Measurement Errors 1 0 ee ee eee Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Output Errors Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors 192 193 195 200 209 210 212 213 191 Things to Check First Section 8 1 8 1 Things to Check First Check the indicators and wiring Check the switches Determine the error from the status Determine the error from the current situation 192 If an error occurs check the following items and take corrective measures if required Check the EJ1 operating status by looking at the indicators If the ERR indicator is lit cycle the EJ1 power supply If the ERR indicator does not light when power comes back ON check for noise as the cause of the error and take countermeasures Check the switch settings and wiring e Power Supply e s the power turned ON e Is the power supply voltage within the allowable range e Switches Are the switch settings correct for the system being used e Wiring s the terminal block correctly wired e s the polarity correct Are any wires disconnected e Are any wires or cables broken or touching e Communications Conditions e Do the communications conditions match those of the host system If none of these check items needs correction
90. the Request Bits 3 The EJ1 performs a multi action 131 Programless Communications Section 5 1 PLC processing EJ1 processing Sets the Request Bits 1 to 0002 Checks the Hequest Bits 2 Sets the Response Bits to 0002 3 Multi action Operation 1 The PLC clears the Request Bits stopped 2 The EJ1 clears the Response Bits PLC processing EJ1 processing Clears the Request Clears the Response Mp da Bits Bits 132 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Operation Procedure Monitor Once the PLC sets the value of the Read Request Bits the EJ1 writes the value set under Programless Upload Settings to the PLC memory area e Single Read The parameters set in the Programless Upload Setting are read once 3 The EJ1 sets the Read Response Bits PLC Upload Area E Download Area EJ1 I I I PLC Upload Area Download Area Setting Change Setting Change Operation Command Aas Operation Command Response Bits N Request Bits i i Communications Operation Status Command Code eX sme 5 The EJ1 clears the Head Response Bits 133 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e Multi Read The parameters set in the Programless Upload Setting are read continu ously 2 The EJ1 sets the Read Response Bits PLC Upload Area Download Area 0002 0002 EJ1 HFU TC4 2 Setting Change Had Setting Change Response Bi
91. the power is qu ON e Set the Operation After Power ON parameter to Continue e Execute a RUN start operation operation command an event input and an unintended bank has been selected changed to an event input The deviation alarm and absolute value alarm settings for e Set the correct alarm mode alarm mode are incorrect 212 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors Section 8 8 8 8 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors HB Heater Burnout Alarm or Heater Burnout Not Detected OOO o Pessbiecase Countermeasure Connection No current transformer CT is connected m The CT is connected to the wrong channel Sm The ON time for control output is less than 100 ms e Set the control output ON time to 100 ms or more This will make the HB alarm operate The HB alarm is not assigned to a control output or bus out Assign an HB alarm to a control output or bus output put The heater power was turned ON after operation control e Turn ON the heater power then start operation control started The heater burnout detection current is set to 0 0 or 100 A Set an appropriate value between 0 1 and 99 9 A The heater burnout detection current is the heater rated cur e Measure the heater current and set the detection current rent value The measured heater burnout detection current is not suit Set the detection c
92. to 100 0 mom eee old 01D4 E G3ZA1 CH5 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 mum e m old 01D5 G3ZA1 CH6 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 pope ceres old 01D6 ANE G3ZA1 CH7 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 pole eee m old 01D7 pU G3ZA1 CH8 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 po edes old 01D8 G3ZA1 CH1 MV at Communications H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 926 NUM Error 01D9 G3ZA1 CH2 MV at Communications H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 926 NUM Error 01DA G3ZA1 CH3 MV at Communications H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 96 NUM Error 01DB G3ZA1 CH4 MV at Communications H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 96 NUM Error 01DC G3ZA1 CH5 MV at Communications H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 926 NUM Error 01DD G3ZA1 CH6 MV at Communications H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 96 NUM Error 01DE G3ZA1 CH7 MV at Communications H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 96 NUM Error 01DF G3ZA1 CH8 MV at Communications H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 96 NUM Error 01E0 G3ZA1 Number of Current Error Detec H 00000000 to H 000000C8 0 to 200 3 Times NUM tion Delays Not used G3ZA2 CH1 Slope The rest are the same as the G3ZA1 G3ZA3 CH1 Slope G3ZAA CH1 Slope O e Q R Co Nh Q Q e eo eo eo 3ZA5 CH1 Slope G3ZA6
93. used to reserve words for future use Note The words set to Not used cannot be used for any other purpose except the programless function e Only channels 1 and 2 can be set for TC2 Units e Unit numbers can be between O and 31 but one HFU can manage only up to 16 Basic Units CX Thermo Programless Upload Settings Setting Screen Vw Trans a moria Par artes d dicor UE E Pere AA Semi Fais we EP TIT nex a 1 pm Pro qmamlirss Upload Settings Progqimloss Downlond Gotinga u dsr res arre la sz Cc dederis po Eten Rum taw Mare Ma Ua ho Channel Pamain sma B oet C radar hami is ia T ES sesocoons SSF RFR SSS RSE PR CS RSA d hae virg Fa vo Fa ntn d 8e copy e eked ty a aga CS N Caution e There are 304 programless upload and 304 programless download set tings 604 each for version MAMI which are linked to data to the PLC memory from the start address to the end code OOFF Always set an end code at the end of linked data because all 304 pieces of data will be linked if there is no end code 604 for version MARI Each start area contains a reserved area used to control programless communications from the PLC Information on how to use programless uploading and downloading is provided under 5 1 4 Description of Opera tion e The communications speed will drop if there is a lot of linked data Adjust the number of linked data items that are set to suit the system 124 Pro
94. with the variable type in the order specified in the command 1 Variable Type and Read Address Refer to Parameter List on page 221 Composite reads cannot be performed for the DA 9A variable types 2 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to 00 3 Response Codes Response code 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 110B Response too long The number of elements exceeds the maximum 1100 Bit position is not OO 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 4 No of Read Data Items Variable Type Read Data Read data length No of read data items For double word 8 digit variable type 32 max 0020H For word 4 digit variable type 41 max 0029H 164 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 4 Composite Write to Variable Area This service writes in order the contents of specified addresses to a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variable write address Bit Write data type position 011 113 010 2 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code 0 1 113 2 2 4 1 Variable Type and Write Address Refer to Parameter List on page 221 Composite writes cannot be performed for the DA 9A variable types 2 Bit Position The EJ1 does n
95. 0 C 1 EU is 1 C and when the input temperature setting range is 20 0 to 500 0 C 1 EU is 0 1 C For analog inputs the size of EU varies according to the decimal point position of the scaling set ting and 1 EU becomes the minimum scaling unit xvii xviii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 OUUING me Drm 1 ll Namesof Parts secas br ss pes scsi apodo ao ao eo d sa sebas Beene ee eee 2 1 2 T O Configuration and Main Functions 0 0 0 eee eee eens 5 1 3 Internal Block Diagrams 0 20 0 0 0 ccc eens 9 SECTION 2 Preparations 45 229 9exyERRYESSORE es l Zak 3Installablollua ss omo e erar o gn 12 222 Witte Timina acce dao 9 9t ect ho aerea cdo aras on d etre 16 2 9 Usine Tool POR ae sauer He oon rE e Ode ah Wee dde te PE E E qaty dg udo 22 2 4 Umt Configuration Examples 2a dk Rom RR ELO CR shoe wees 26 SECTION 3 Typical Control Examples 33 3 1 Minimum Configuration for Control 0 0 0 0 re 34 3 2 Multi channel Control 2 0 een eee eens 38 3 3 Control Linked to a Host Device 2 0 0 0 0 0 enn nnes 41 3 4 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices 00004 45 SECTION 4 Basic Units TC4 and TC2 Functions 49 4 1 Setting Input Specifications 51 4 2 Setting Output Specifications 0 eee eee e eee e ees 57 4 3 Setting Control Specifications sses sennae 63 4 4 Setting Alarm Spec
96. 000 to 0002 Confirm that the Read Response Bits D00000 are set to 0002 Confirm that D00004 and D00005 are set to the channel 1 and channel 2 process values The EJ1 set value will be continuously read if DO1000 is set to 0002 Set D01000 to 0000 to stop reading the set value DM Area Value Meaning __ Procedure step number and confirmation Hem D00001 0000 Seting Change Response Bits Doooo2 0000 Operation Command Response BIS D00004 Step 3 Channel 1 Process Value Step 3 Set to the channel 1 process value by the system D00005 Step 3 Channel 2 Process Value Step 3 Set to channel 2 process value by the system Read Request Bits Read Request Bits Step 1 Set from PLC user program D01001 0000 Setting Change Request Bits E Changing EJ1 Set Values Use the following procedure to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 set points change 114 1 2 3 1 2 Set D01004 and D01005 in PLC memory to 0064 Set the Setting Change Request Bits D01001 to 0001 Programless Communications Section 5 1 3 Confirm that the Setting Change Response Bits D00001 have been set to 0001 4 Use the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software to confirm that the EJ1 channel 1 and channel 2 set points have changed to 100 To check op eration again set DO1000 to 0000 and once D00001 has changed to 0000 repeat the procedure from step 1 DM Area Valuue Meaning Procedure step number and confirmation
97. 00000000 to H 000000A5 Oto 165 o as mum e GSZA1 CTZ Heater ON Current Monitor A F 00000000 to H 000000A5 Oto 165 o as mum e po an O ASA GSZA CTSHesterON Current Monitor A F 00000000 to H 000000A5 Oto 165 o as num e p ld 2 BL E CH1 Heater OFF Current Monitor A EA E E EE CT1 Heater OFF Current EA H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to m A Monitor G3ZA1 CH2 Heater OFF Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 00000037 0 to 55 UNS UNE E G3ZA1 CT2 Heater OFF Current EA H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 A Monitor 0116 G3ZA1 CH3 Heater OFF Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 00000037 0 to 55 UNE NL A E E E CT3 Heater OFF Current EA H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 A Monitor 0117 83Z2A1 CH4 Heater OFF Current Monitor H 00000000 to H 00000037 0 to 55 MM A EN EMEN CT4 Heater OFF Current H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 A Monitor Not used 0200 mM G3ZA2 CH1 Control Variable Monitor The rest are the same as the G3ZAf1 O 0300 ezom Control Variable Mentor _ __Q QA 0400 GSZM OHiComwiVamBeMowor O t I 0500 GSZAs CHiComwdVatbeMomor ERNGN OC 0600 GSZA5 CHiComwiVambeMomor icu A 0700 feza om Cowo vanem EXEC cC VJ M RR 0300 GSZAs CHiComwiVambeMowor EGER n A a 0115 2
98. 0000022 CH1 Alarm 3 34 H 00000023 CH1 All alarm OR 35 H 00000024 CH1 All alarm AND 36 H 00000025 CH1 Input error 37 H 00000026 CH1 RSP Input error 38 H 00000028 CH1 HB Heater Burnout alarm 40 H 00000029 CH1 HS Heater Short alarm 41 H 0000002A CH1 OC Heater Overcurrent alarm 42 H 0000002B CH1 PV 43 H 0000002C CH1 SP 44 Variable CompoWay F type Category Add Address ress E1 A1 Can be 0100 changed while stopped 0101 0102 H 0000002D CH1 Local SP 45 H 0000002E CH1 Remote SP 46 H 0000002F CH1 Control output heating 47 H 00000030 CH1 Control output cooling 48 H 0000003A ch1 Transfer Output Heating 58 TC2 H 0000003B ch1 Transfer Output Cooling 59 H 00000040 Channel 2 The same as channel 1 64 H 00000060 Channel 3 The same as channel 1 96 H 00000080 Channel 4 The same as channel 1 128 TC4 S Control Period 1 H 00000000 to H 00000063 0 to 99 2 0 5 s period when set to 0 Linear Output 1 Type H 00000000 4 to 20mA 0 H 00000001 O to 20mA 1 Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 100 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 Decimal Point C1 H 00000000 No decimal point 0 1 0 0105 H 00000001 H 00000002 2 H 00000003 3 4 N Not used 0200 Control Output 2 Assignm
99. 0003 H 00000004 H 00000005 H 00000006 H 00000007 H 00000008 H 00000009 H 0000000A H 0000000B H 0000000C H 0000000D EMC 13 MC protocol format 5 H 00000000 Data register D 0 H 00000001 Link register RSS 2 H 00000002 File register R 0033 ME Programless Communications Upload Start H 00000000 to H C RIED gt to 32767 Address 0034 Programless Communications Download Start H 00000000 to H 00007FFF 0 to 32767 Address 0035 Programless Communications Receive Wait H 0000000A to H 00002710 10 to 10000 Time See note 1 0036 Programless Communications Node Address H 00000000 to H 00000063 0 to 99 See note 1 0037 Programless Communications Maxi V1 1 H 00000000 to H 00000039F 0 to 63 mum Communications Unit Number 0038 Selection of Programless Communi H 00000000 Son e cations Operation during Error H 00000001 Stop 1 Output ON Scheduling Method H 00000000 No EIC H 00000001 1 2 1 H 00000002 1 4 2 H 00000002 NT Link 1 N il Not used Common O ommon BN E O ommon O ommon ommon O ommon O K ommon N O e oo o oo o o 236 Appendix Parameter List CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 FO Enabled BRAE 0042 Delay Between Output Channels See note 2 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 to 1000 10 ms Commo
100. 0270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 p BANK SUE heal 1 CH1 010F 024F Bank 0 Alarm Lower Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 AK ae BANK ie lea 1 CH1 0110 0250 Bank O Alarm Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 0111 0251 Bank O Alarm Upper Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 proe BANK EE 2 CH1 0112 0252 Bank o Alarm Lower Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 E EN BANK e 2 a 0113 0253 Bank 0 Alarm Value 3 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK j 0114 0254 Bank o Alarm Upper Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 H RES BANK or 0115 0255 Bank O Alarm Lower Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 i ee BANK er 3 CH1 Not used EM TE E AE E ie eos OO O Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 as Bank 0 Set Point CH3 sik ERE GRE M mr 5400 9840 BskoSeRam OR4 AA ra M m CR RR M rn 1 Note 1 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 224 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay
101. 1 is outputting in manual mode Procedure The control system is radiating heat The overshoot is too large e Stop manual mode e Execute heating and cooling control Use the countermeasures listed in the Overshooting or Undershooting troubleshooting table Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors Section 8 6 Overshooting or Undershooting Countermeasure Connection Measured temperature is wrong Perform the action outlined in 7 5 A general purpose thermometer with slow thermal response Change to a sheathed thermometer has been connected to a control system with fast thermal response Setting The proportional band value is too low e Increase the proportional band within a range with an acceptable response delay Execute autotuning AT The integral time is too short e Increase the integral time within a range with an acceptable response delay e Execute autotuning AT The derivative time is too short Increase the derivative time within a range that does not adversely affect the stability of stabilization time Execute autotuning AT ON OFF control is operating Execute P control or PID control The control cycle is too long for the control system with its e Shorten the control cycle fast thermal response The overlap band in the heating and cooling control is set to Set to an overlap band a dead band by mistake Hunting The trou
102. 108 a oma G8ZA1 CHS Source Channel H 00000001 to H 00000008 7108 5 J forts GSZi CH6ScuceChame Hr 00000001 to H 00000008 7108 s Num je n6 G8ZA1 GH Source Channel H 00000001 to H 00000008 1108 7 num _ ew orcas romero wm Je mr GGZA1 CH1 Heater Burnout Detection Value A ee eie E G3ZA1 CT1 Heater Burnout Detection H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to m peces Value 0119 G3ZA1 CH2 Heater Burnout Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 O Ja NUM j G3ZA1 CT2 Heater Burnout Detection m H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 pope eee Value 011A E G3ZA1 CH3 Heater Burnout Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 O Ja NUM j G3ZA1 CT3 Heater Burnout Detection H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 A A A Value 011B e G3ZA1 CH4 Heater Burnout Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 o JaA NUM j G3ZA1 CT4 Heater Burnout Detection H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 eee Value 011C um G3ZA1 CH1 SSR Short Circuit Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 50 A NUM j G3ZA1 CT1 SSR Short Circuit Detection m H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 165 pe ee Value 011D d G3ZA1 CH2 SSR Short Circuit Detection Value H 00000000 to H 00000032 0 to 50 50 Ja NUM j G3ZA1 CT2 SSR Short Circuit Detection H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 MEE NE Value
103. 2 2C MV3 CX Correct the communications settings Thermo Support Software Serial port COM See note K3SC 10 i i B settings are incorrect Boda 38 4 kbps RS 485 EJ1 Data length 7 bit Stop bit 2 bit Parity Even bit Unit number See note Eonmmee en Note Match the serial port and unit port l number settings to the system Serial port used The Interface Converter com Refer to the Interface Converter man munications conditions are ual and match the communications different from the EJ1 commu conditions to the EJ1 communica K35C 10 Interface Converter nications settings tions settings The Interface Converter con Refer to the computer Interface Con nection is incorrect verter and EJ1 manuals and wire the connection correctly There is no device on the Specify a unit number in the commu communications path with the nications settings for a device on the specified unit number communications path There is a device on the com Change the unit number in the com munications path with the munications settings so that the unit same unit number numbers are not duplicated Connection port Cannot connect online The EJ1 is connected to port The EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Sup C on the HFU port Software cannot be connected to the HFU Connection Connect it to port A on the EDU PC RS 232C RS 485 EJ1 Connection port Connection port Gompe EJ1 Port C
104. 2 kbps See note e Set the settings other than baud rate to the following default settings Port B Communications Data Length 7 bit Port B Communications Parity Even bit Port B Communications Stop Bits 2 bit Connection The PT communications settings are made on the PT System Screen e Move to the System Screen display the Communications Settings Screen and set the destination for the communica tions port to Temperature Controller e Set the baud rate the same as the EJ1 baud rate There is an HFU connected to Port B cannot be used for communi the EJ1 cations if an HFU is connected to the EJ1 Hint When Using HFUs Connect to port A on the Programmable Terminal The following restrictions apply e The HFU cannot be used at the same time as the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software e The baud rate is fixed at 38 4 kbps If an HFU is Not Required Disconnect the HFU and restart the EJ1 Note The baud rate and communications distance sometimes depend on the com munications partner Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 Serial Connection of NS series Programmable Terminals The Smart Active Part SAP does not communicate with the EJ1 Connection NS series SCB SCU RS 485 EJ1 or NS series SCB SCU CJ1W CIF 1 1
105. 2 to 15 Not used Lower level I O Alarm 4 Basic Unit Expand Unit Alarm Status C4 84 0010 Expand Unit 1 Alarm Expand Unit 2 Alarm Expand Unit 3 Alarm Expand Unit 4 Alarm Expand Unit 5 Alarm Expand Unit 6 Alarm Expand Unit 7 Alarm Expand Unit 8 Alarm Bits 8 to 11 Not used m Bits 12 to 15 Not used 1 O Notification 1 I O Notification A Status C4 84 0009 BitO CT1 Heater Current Hold Bits 1 to 3 Not used Bit4 CT2 Heater Current Hold Bits 5 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bit 15 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used 198 Determining the Error from the Status Output Status Control Output 1 Control Output 2 Control Output 3 Control Output 4 Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used Device B Status Save RAM 1 Save RAM 2 Save Control Parameters Registration of unit configuration Registration of multiple reads Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bit 8 Write Mode Bit9 EEPROM Bits 10 to 11 Not used Bit 12 Configuration Registered Bits 13 to 15 Not used HFU Device Error 0 1 Configuration Error Not used External RAM Error at Operation Bit4 Internal Communications Error Bit5 Not used Bit6 Programless Link Error Bit7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used Device B Sta
106. 23 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 Can be 0100 0240 Bank 0 Set Point CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 jo JEU BANK e changed during 0101 0241 Bank 0 Proportional Band CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 80 EU BANK j operation 0102 0242 Bank 0 Integral Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 0 to 3999 ENE BANK 0103 0243 Bank 0 Derivative Time CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 400 s BANK 0104 0244 Bank O SP Ramp Rise Value H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 EU s or BANK CH1 Function stops when set to 0 See note 1 EU min 0105 0245 Bank O SP Ramp Fall Value H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 EU sor BANK CH1 Function stops when set to 0 See note 1 EU min Not used 0107 0247 Bank 0 Manual Reset Value H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 BANK e CH1 0108 0248 Bank 0 Cooling Coefficient CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 to 99 99 100 BANK j 0109 0249 Bank 0 Dead Band CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note 2 0 0 EU BANK j Not used 010D 024D Bank 0 Alarm Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 010E 024E Bank O Alarm Upper Limit Value H FFFFF831 to H 000
107. 240 Status Lists Appendix Device A Status C4 84 0000 Bit position Bit description Meaning Bit O Device Error No error Error There is a memory error Refer to Device Error Status Bit 1 Configuration Error No error Error There is an error in the device configuration Refer to Configuration Error A Status and Configu ration Error B Status Bit 2 Channel Error No error Error There is an error in one of the channels Refer to Error Channel A Status Bis Nouse O LLL Bit 4 Expand Communica No error Error There is an error in communications with the con tions Error nected G3ZA Refer to Internal Communications Error Status Bits There is an I O error Bit 10 I O Error No error Refer to O Error Status Bit 11 Lower level I O Error No error Error There is an error in the connected G3ZA Refer to Basic Unit Expand Unit Error Status Bit 12 I O Alarm No error Error There is an I O alarm Refer to VO Alarm A Status and I O Alarm B Status Bit 13 Lower level I O Alarm No error Error An alarm has occurred in the connected G3ZA Refer to Basic Unit Expand Unit Alarm Status Bit 14 I O Notification No error Error There is an I O notification Refer to O Notification A Status Bit 15 a Device Error Status C4 84 0001 Bit position Bit description Meaning Bit EN Bii E Bit Bit 4 No error There is a memory error Bit 5 No error There is a memory error Bit 6 No error There is a memory error Oooo Bit 7 Not u
108. 2940 6 0001700 0003000 20101720 40103040 e 8 100001800 300103200 0101820 0003240 EST me Current input Any of the following ranges by scaling 596 to 105 of the setting range Ot 20mA oB 339109393 0 to 10596 for O to 20 mA Voltage input dto5V 27 199 9 to 999 9 Oto5V 28 19 99 to 99 99 otiov 29 1 999 to 9 999 e Applicable standards by input type are as follows K J T E N R S B JIS C1602 1995 i T 2 o E D pus 2 _ Y o o 5 E Analog inputs L Fe CuNi DIN43710 1985 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 1985 W W5Re W26Re ASTM E988 1990 PLII According to Platinel I Electromotive Force Table by Engelhard Corp JPt100 JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC751 220 Parameter List Appendix Parameter List If variables without parentheses are used in communications the set values will be eight digit double word data If variables with parentheses are used in communications the set values will be four digit word data Example Variable type C4 Double word 8 digits Variable type 84 Word 4 digits Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 G8 Wenior anoo Precessvae CHT Ie Eu amp fe 0001 Saws cHi es Status Liso page 24 o e e ooz inemes em HFFFFES to H 0000270F 199910 9999 Sse roe 2y EU or e
109. 3 4 Adjustment Execute autotuning AT to make the PID adjustments Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning for details 44 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices Section 3 4 3 4 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices 3 4 1 Application In this example configuration G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers are used to control the temperature in a 4 zone heater plate with a single control loop by applying a fixed coefficient slope to the results of the EJ1 s PID calcula tions NS5 Programmable Terminal EJ1 TC4 EDU e CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter RS 485 EJ1C CBLA050 Cable EJ1 channel 1 Temperature Sensor Heater plate Up to 8 Units G3PA G3ZA Power Solid Multi channel state Relays Power Controllers Terminating resistance Up to eight G3ZA Controllers can be connected to the EJ1I TC4 using the special communications ports It is not necessary to create a program for communications between the EJ1 and G3ZA e Also the G3ZA s internal parameters can be set to split a single EJ1 channel s control output into 4 branches with the G3ZA 4HL103 FLK or 8 branches with the G3ZA 8AL 103 FLK A slope coefficient and offset value can be set for each branch output 45 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices Section 3 4 Using the G3ZA s MV Calculations for
110. 4 1 4 Input Shift Correction 0 0 0 eee 53 dales Input Hater ass annie oe toa pee ot eee oe ede a 56 4 2 Setting Output Specifications 0 ccc ee ees 57 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments 0 0 eee ee 57 4 2 2 Control Output Method 0 0 0 ccc eee 58 4 2 3 Output ON Scheduling Function oooooooooooo ooo 58 4 2 4 Output Scaling ua asco ra bnt dee DOES ER dor eb balan 60 4 2 5 Transfer OUIDHUIsS 5 acaso Ee RERO Red uinea oue 61 4 3 Setting Control Specifications 0 0 0 0 ccc eens 63 4 3 1 Starting and Stopping Control 0 0 cee eee 63 4 3 2 Selecting the Control Method oooooooooooo oo 64 4 3 3 Selecting the Output Mode 0 0 eee 67 4 3 4 Seting the Set POIt saa or AREE ace padri EUER 69 4 33 Setting the SF Ras uade Ls Ser Xt IA EO 70 4 550 REMOS uuetpoiecsestauite ute nix A 71 4 3 7 Setting the Manipulated Variable MV 05 74 ADE TONNE uoo eode oT alae dad Ai 76 4 3 9 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function 79 4 3 10 Operation during Errors 0 0 0 ee eens 80 4 4 Setting Alarm Specifications lees 82 dak Alarm PES dA data aia ida 82 AA Alarm Value cosida irlanda 83 4 4 3 Alarm Hysteresis ae dante pea Abre na Rope adi esa 83 A 4 4 Standby Sequence A OA A RES RR RES 84 421 5 Alam dle ad Eu EET D di oa eee 84 4 4 6 Closed in Alarm or Open in AlarM o oooooo
111. 4 Control Output Cooling Channel 4 MV With a TC2 the Channel 3 and 4 MVs will be set to 0 0 The following outputs will be sent whether the control method is set to stan dard or heating cooling control TC4 G3ZA CH1 Control Output Heating Channel 1 MV CH2 Control Output Heating Channel 2 MV CH3 Control Output Heating Channel 3 MV CH4 Control Output CH1 Control Output Cooling Channel 5 MV CH2 Control Output Cooling Channel 6 MV CH3 Control Output Cooling Channel 7 MV AA AAA AAA eee UID Nl ms ms Heating Channel 4 MV CH4 Control Output Channel 8 MV Cooling 1 When standard control is being used the Channel 5 to 8 MVs will be set to 0 0 2 With a TC2 the Channel 3 4 7 and 8 MVs will be set to 0 0 The outputs of predetermined channels are set in the G3ZA s MV but any MV can be output to multiple channels by setting the G3ZA s Source Channel Arithmetic operations can also be executed on each MV Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 N Caution If the MV is stored or calculated at the G3ZA and the G3ZA is turned ON before the EJ1 the controlled variable produced at the G3ZA will be output the output may not be 0 096 until the EJ1 starts operating When using MV storage or MV calculation verify that the controlled variable produced by the G3ZA is appropriate m Example In this example the TC4 s channel 1 Control
112. 5 T RS 232C RS 422A 485 EJ1 CJ1 series PLC HFU TC4 TC4 TC4 EDU o B O Cz Sita Sl ela SS ces Ser EE Al a E El El D 0 ED ED ED E E da alles mt a e E E deo ee ce x o o 3 ba Eb 3 ge 69 ce dls cad oda A ES T Qa S gg SA A El e E Oe OE OS Og us RS 232C Sensor inputs LL Pr El EH A A a RS RS Hl Workpiece roni Control outputs gt o Hei e a E S S S Gu G3NA Solid State Relays e f an EJ1LJ HFU is used a ladder program does not have to be created to exchange data such as temperature readings and alarm status with the PLC Also up to 16 Basic Units can be connected to a single HFU to expand the system to a maximum of 64 channels 41 Control Linked to a Host Device Section 3 3 3 3 2 Wiring Connect the Temperature Sensors to the input terminals according to the sen sor s input type e Connect the Solid State Relays to the output terminals e Connect the PLC with an RS 232C communications cable Wire the circuits as shown below when using an EJ1LJ HFU and three EJ1L TC4 Units The following diagram shows the wiring for just one of the EJ1L TC4 Units EJ10 TC4 OUT4 E ES 63 OUT3 AS k o 9 o o 9o age ou SE AZ eA0OlIoOAO malta O Heater Temperature amp eS Sensor IN1 OS QO
113. 5O order separately cable length 5 m Use a JST Mfg Co Ltd PA connector Housings Model PAP 02V S Crimp Terminals Model SPHD 001T P0 5 Use an EJ1 CBLA050 Cable manufactured by OMRON The EJ1 contains 120 Q of terminating resistance Connect a terminating resistor 110 to 125 Q 1 2 W only to the end G3ZA node Using Tool Ports Section 2 3 2 3 Using Tool Ports 2 3 1 Procedure 1 2 3 Tool ports are used to make EJ1 settings using the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software The E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the con nection 1 Turn ON the power to the EJ1 Note Do not connect the E58 CIFQ1 when power to the EJ1 is OFF If the Cable is connected when the power to the EJ1 is OFF power will be supplied from the computer and impose a load on the inter nal circuits of the EJ1 2 Connect the Cable Connect the computer s USB port with the port A connector on the EJ1 us ing the Cable Port A connector N E58 CIFQ1 d Computer EDU Front View 3 Install the driver A driver must be installed to use the Cable e When the Cable is connected with the computer the OS will detect a new device Follow the installation wizard instructions and install the driver Note For details on installation methods refer to the user s manual for the E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable 4 Make th
114. 9 9 A 100 0 HB Alarm ON enm See note 4 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Hys En i 1to 100 0 A A eee C5 85 Heater Current Value 1 or 2 0 0 to 110 0 A Monitor 1 0 Conditions for use There must be a CT input 3 The HB Alarm can be forced OFF or ON regardless of the actual heater current value by setting the Heater Burnout Detection parameter to 0 0 or 100 0 Use the 0 0 and 100 0 settings to check operation 4 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped The hysteresis setting prevents chattering at the detection point e Turn the heater ON before the EJ1 or turn both ON simultaneously If the heater power is turned ON after turning ON the EJ1 the HB Alarm will be output e Control will be continued even when there is an HB Alarm e The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual cur rent flowing to the heater Check the current value in an actual operating state in the Heater Current Monitor Value 1 or 2 parameter e f there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may become unstable To stabilize detection set a cur rent value difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters of less than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or more If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the diagram below Looping it through twice will double the detection current Load line CT B Heater B
115. Address 0107 39 Multi channel Control Section 3 2 Related parameters Description CH3 Set Point Variable type D4 Address 0300 CHA Set Point Variable type D4 Address 0400 Note e Connect the PT to port B e Set the write mode to backup mode e Setthe PT s communications parameters the same as the port B commu nications parameters 3 2 4 Adjustment Execute autotuning AT to make the PID adjustments Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning for details 40 Control Linked to a Host Device Section 3 3 3 3 Control Linked to a Host Device 3 3 1 Application In this example configuration a CJ1 series PLC controls a reflow oven and an EJ1 performs temperature control on 6 zones and 12 control loops in the oven NS8 Programmable Terminal 3G3RV Inverter CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter RS 48
116. Alarm 241 I O Error 241 I O Notification 241 Lower level I O Alarm 241 Lower level I O Error 241 Device B Status HFU 251 EEPROM 251 Registration of unit configuration Registration of multiple reads 251 Save RAM 2 251 Write Mode 251 Device B Status TCA TC2 247 Configuration Registered 247 EEPROM 247 Registration of unit configuration Registration of multiple reads 247 save Control Parameters 247 Save RAM 1 247 save RAM 2 247 Write Mode 247 Device Error Status HFU 250 EEPROM Error 250 Model Information Data Error 250 Model Information Mismatching Error 250 Setting Value Error 250 Device Error Status TC4 TC2 241 Calibration Error 241 Configuration Registration Data Error 241 EEPROM 241 EEPROM Error 241 Model Information Mismatching Error 241 Setting Value Error 241 dimensions 12 direct operation cooling 67 disturbance gain 79 disturbance overshoot adjustment function 79 disturbance time constant 79 driver installation 25 E echoback test 171 EDU xvii 18 EEPROM 7 173 217 end code 159 BCC error 159 FINS command error 159 Format error 159 Frame length error 159 Framing error 159 Normal completion 159 Overrun error 159 Parity error 159 Sub address error 159 End Plate 15 End Unit EDU 6 Error Channel A Status TC4 TC2 245 CHI 245 CH2 245 CH3 245 CH4 245 error code 181 error status 125 EU Engineering Unit xvii
117. B and W thermocouple inputs 1 of PV or x10 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Other thermocouple inputs 1 of PV or x4 C whichever is greater 1 digit max But K Sensors 100 C max or 10 C max Platinum resistance thermometer inputs 1 of PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max Analog input 1 FS or 1 digit whichever is greater Conditions Temperature range 10 C to 23 C to 55 C Voltage range 15 to 10 217 Current Transformer Current Transformer Specifications Specifications Model es cm E54 CT3 120 A See note Dielectric strength 1 000 VAC for 1 min Vibration resistance 50 Hz 98 m s Weight proc 115g Approx 50 Accessories Armatures 2 plugs 2 Note The maximum continuous current of the EJ1 is 100 A Dimensions E54 CT1 E54 CT3 218 Appendix ASCII Table Appendix ASCII Table Leftmost digit A digit nu DE space ode ape qe ECC SEE 219 Sensor Input Ranges Appendix Sensor Input Ranges Set value ton ce e Platinum O 20010850 300101500 22010870 340t0 1540 peus 1 199 9 0 500 0 1999109000 219 9 to 520 0 239 9 to 940 0 Jno e 1999105000 1999109000 219 910 620 0 290 9 to 940 0 ne Pe C ES 8 200104000 00107500 400104200 400107900 e 20010400 30010700 22010420 340to740 AA ee A m aea Soe N 15 200101800 800102800 220101820 34010
118. C 0 1 1 2 2 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Variable Read address Bit m code type position O 1 1 2 010 2 2 4 2 4 2 Variable Read address Bit type position 010 2 4 2 1 Response Codes Response code 1001 Command too long The command is too long 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 2 Variable Type and Read Address Refer to Parameter List on page 221 3 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to 00 4 No of Registered Data Items Variable Type Read Address Bit Posi tion Registered data length No of registered data items For double word 8 digit variable type 20 max 0014H For word 4 digit variable type 168 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 8 Controller Attribute Read This service reads the model number and communications buffer size E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC 015 WI 2 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Model Buffer size code 015 013 2 2 4 10 4 1 Model From 1 to 10 in 1 2 3 Model Number Legend can be read Example Input range TEE IEEE SES ue pes EIJ 1 N T C 4 A QQ 2 Buffer Size The communications buffer size is expressed in 2 byte hexadecimal and read after being converted to 4 byte ASCII The buffer size
119. CH1 Slope e Q Q O 0700 G3ZA7 CH1 Slope CE Ya Y joao AAN A E RN Note 1 Valid after a Software Reset operation command or after power is turned ON Refer to the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller Users Manual Cat No Z200 2 Parameters with the following mark are supported only by version 2 G3ZA Power Controllers EAJ Hefer to the GSZA Multi channel Power Controller User s Manual Cat No Z200 for information on G3ZA functionality 23 pd Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F type Category Add Address ress EO AO Can be Not Not used changed while 0001 stopped Parameter name Setting monitor range O M n T Tees Te I7 Junction Compensation H 00000000 Externally i Common Method H 00000001 Internally 1 Input Type CH1 H 00000000 Pt100 0 H 00000001 Pt100 1 H 00000002 Pt100 2 H 00000003 JPt100 3 H 00000004 JPt100 4 H 00000005 H 00000006 H 00000007 H 00000008 H 00000009 H 0000000A H 0000000B H 0000000C H 0000000D H 0000000E H 0000000F H 00000010 H 00000011 S H 00000012 B H 00000013 W 19 H 00000014 PLII 20 H 00000015 10 to 70 C 21 H 00000016 60 to 120 C 22 H 00000017 115 to 165 C 23 H 00000018 140 to 260 C 24 H 00000019 4 to 20 mA 25 H 00000014 O to 20 mA 26 H 0000001B 1 to 5 V 27 H 0000001C 0 to 5 V 28 H 0000001D 0
120. CT input When each phase s current is normal the current is 17 3 A 3 x 10 A Heater Burnout Occurred Burnout 10A Burnout Load Heater Load Heater example Le S 200 V example 8 PS GA 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V To CT input To CT input 10 A gt 15 A gt To CT input To CT input 4 Current when there is a burnout 10 Ax 3 x ES Current when there is a burnout 10 A x 3 x E 15A 10A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load line is as fol lows Heater burnout detection current VOS 16 15 A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows Heater burnout detection current A 13 65 A To enable detection in either case use 16 1 A as the heater burnout detection current 92 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 b Star Connection Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal Operation 5 8 A gt Load 200 V Load Heater example 200 V SOS ga 5 8 A KS o CT 200 V To CT input A Lo 5 8 A gt CT To CT input When each phase s current is normal the current is 5 8 A 10 Ax 3 Heater Burnout Occurred Burnout 5A gt 200 V Load Heater 200 V Load Heater example example 200 V 200 V To CT input Burnout To CT input To CT input 1 Current when there is a burnout 10 A x ki x EJ Current when there is a
121. Cat No H142 E1 02B Modular Temperature Controller USER S MANUAL EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers User s Manual Revised March 2007 Preface This manual describes the EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers including information on functions performances and application methods Observe the following precautions when using an EJ1 Modular Temperature Controller e Do not allow the Temperature Controller to be handled by anyone except a specialist with sufficient knowledge of electrical systems e Read this manual thoroughly and be sure you understand it before attempting to use the Temperature Controller and use the Temperature Controller correctly according to the information provided e Keep this manual in a safe place for easy reference Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera tion of the product 12 34 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2006 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover
122. Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 RS 485 EJ1 HFU TC EDU SYSMAC CS CJ series PLC 30000 O l o leelse e Pe d EJ1 HFU TC EDU Unit No O Unit No 7 Note Set the unit number of the Basic Unit to any number that was not set for the HFU 146 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 SYSMAC CS CJ series PLC EJ1N HFULJ NFLK RS 485 de Si Shield B 61 igna A 7 83 aa L O 63 6 fso i1 62 63 G 6 EJ1N HFULI NFLK The 2 4 wire switch is set for a 2 wire connection G5 8 G3 9 8 G2 3 9 22 8 8 C 8 8 9 9 A9 e DASS 2 Make the PLC settings Referring to Make the PLC settings on page 113 set the maximum unit number to the highest unit number of a connected HFU Other settings are the same m Example If three HFUs are connected set the maximum unit number to 2 3 Make the EJ1 settings Make the following setting in all HFUs that are connected Variable type Setting Monitor values FO BO Programless Communications Protocol 2 NT Link 1 N Refer to 5 1 3 Detailed Settings for information on data linked with the PLC Be sure that the areas of PLC memory used by the different HFUs do not overlap INCORRECT CORRECT PLC Memory P
123. DMAma Maig SSS D00000 Read Response Bits D00001 Setting Change Response Bits D00002 Operation Command Response Bits D01000 Read Request Bits D01001 Setting Change Request Bits D01002 Operation Command Request Bits The Request Bits are set to the following values Bits Vae Aon Read Request 0000 Stop operation Stops operation after a series of operations has been completed Bits 0001 Single Reads the parameters set in the Programless Upload Setting Area once 0002 Multi Continuously reads the parameters set in the Programless Upload Setting Area 0003 Read setting Reads the parameters set in the Programless Download Setting Area and writes them to the upload area 0004 Read setting 2 Reads the parameters set in the Programless Download Setting Area and writes them to the download area Setting Change 0000 Stop operation Stops operation after a series of operations has been completed Request Bits 9901 Single Changes only the parameters set in the Programless Download Setting for which values have been changed 0002 Multi Continuously repeats the operation of changing only the parameters set in the Programless Download Setting for which values have been changed 130 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Bits Action Operation 0000 Stop operation Stops operation after a series of operations has been completed Command 0001 Single Executes the operation command set in the Operation Com
124. Distributed placement is possible by using multiple End Units O o o 29 ET 2o Qo o o 5 38 30 Qo o eeepc EJ10 TC4 EJ or EJ1LJ HFU EJ1LI TC2 EJ1LJ EDU PLC I d Port A connector USB connection E can be made using the E58 CIFQ1 a JE a Sal Ol sold separately CX Thermo for setting P e s e RE jas ED as KD ANIS is Se ER OS d SEA EQ NA OU SO OS N
125. E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC 0 1 1 0 2 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response _ Variable Read data code type 0 1 1 0 2 D 4 2 No of elements x 8 or 4 mm Variable Read data type 2 No of elements x 8 or 4 1 Response Codes Response code 1001 Command too long The command is too long 110B Response too long The number of elements exceeds the maximum 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error Normal completion Processing was completed normally 2 Variable Type Refer to Parameter List on page 221 3 No of Read Data Items Read data length No of read data items For double word 8 digit variable type 20 max 0014H For word 4 digit variable type 166 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 6 Composite Read Registration This service specifies the addresses to be read when using the composite read registration from variable area service The registered data is saved in EEPROM E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variable Read address Bit Variable Read address Bit type position type position 0 1 1 1 010 010 2 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code 01111011 2 2 4 1 Variable Type and Read Address Refer to Parameter List on page 221 Composite reads writes cannot be registered for the DA 9A variable types 2 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit a
126. Et e The RS 485 connection can be either 1 1 or 1 N RS 232C connections can only be 1 1 A maximum of 64 Units including the host can be con nected in 1 N systems The maximum total cable length is 500 m Use AWG28 cross sectional area 0 081 mm to AWG16 cross sectional area 1 309 mm shielded twisted pair cable RS 485 Terminator 110 to 125 Q 1 2 W Cross sectional area of conductor AWG28 0 081 mm AWG16 1 309 mm 23 Wiring Terminals Connecting to the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller x X g i es HET FB H nm j Connect the G3ZA Connecting Cable to the CN1 connector on the bottom of the TC Unit 1 gt B CN1 2 gt A TC4 2 x NN 24 Section 2 2 Set SW2 to 3 57 6 kbps Connect the black line with a white stripe to terminal 7 on the G3ZA and the black d 15D b line with no stripe to terminal 8 LL EJ1 CBLAO
127. F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range i ON gr Target Unit able Category Add Address TC4 ress Lg H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 O EU BANK e eI e EEE IE ION cd cau DA e e a o ELI CUL LIC TC pane fo C e gu mer i Function stops en set to 0 EU min H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 E ee Function stops when set to 0 EU min Not used 0107 0267 Bank 1 Manual Reset Value CHT H 00000000 10 H 000003E8 0010 1000 soo w eank Jo J 0108 0268 Bank 1 Cooling Coefcient CH H 0000000110 H 0000270F 0 01 to 09 89 t00 BANK e foros 0269 BankTDeadBani CHi HFEFFFBSI to H 0000270 198 10 969 8 See noie 2 0 0 EU Bank o Not used 0100 026d Bank Alarm Value 1 OH1 H FEFFFBS1iO H 0000270F 1909 to 6998 Ses note 1 Jo EU BANK Jo J oros 026E Bank Y Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 CH1 H FFFFFSSi to H 0000270F C1990 to 9999 See note 1 o EU Bank fe 0T0F o26F Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 CHT H FFFFFGGI to H 0000270F 199910 9899 See note 1 0 EU Bank e foro 0270 Bank t Alarm Value CHT H FFFFFB81 to H 0000270F 199910 9899 See note 1 0 EU BANK fe fort 0271 Bank T Alam Upper Limit Value CHT H FFFFF8S1 to H 0000270F 199910 9999 See note 1 o EU Bank e orta ozrz Bank Y Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 CH1 H FFFFFBBT to H 0000270F 1998109999 See nte 1 Jo Eu BANK gt
128. F831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note lee BANK alla 2 Not used Does BankzAamVauei CHi H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199810 9989 See nate1 0 FU Bankje J 010E 028E Bank 2 Alarm Upper Limit Value T CHT H FFEFF831 to H 0000270F 1980 10 9899 See note 1 0 EU Bank o TOF 028F Bank 2 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 CH1 W FFFFF8S1 to H 0000270F C1999 to 8999 See note 1 o EU BANK e orto 0280 BenkzAamVauez CHi HFEFFFBS1 to 0000270F 1909 to 9990 See note 1 o EU BANK je rt 0291 Bank 2 Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 CH H FFEFF831 to H 0000270F 1989 10 9899 See note 1 0 EU Bank o oz 0282 Bank 2 Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 CHT H FFFFF88T to H 0000270F 1909 to 8999 See note 1 o EU BANK Je ris 0293 Bank 2 Alarm Value 3 OH1 H FFFFF8S1 to H 0000270F 1998 to 9989 See note 1 0 EU BANK je _ 0114 0294 Bank 2 Alarm Upper Limit Value 3 CHT H FFEFF831 to H 0000270 1989 10 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK e H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to See note 1 o EU BANK Not used eop p LI E A 1 ace Note 1 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 225 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F M
129. FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999109999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 02D4 Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 3 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 ERE BANK UBL CH1 02D5 Present Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 3 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 Rd BANK M CH1 Not used 0200 04CO Present Bank Set Point CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 0300 06CO Present Bank Set Point CH3 TOA 0400 0800 Present Bank Set PO RA TARA mL ANN Note 1 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O dec imal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 226 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range apio Category Add Address ress Can be 0100 02E0 Input Digital Filter CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 0 to 999 9 dd ul 02E1 Input Value 1 for Input Correction H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 ETE operation 0102 02E2 Input Shift 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note 2 0 0 EU ch j 0103 02E3 Input Value 2 for Input Correction H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 1000 Er m 0104 02E4 Input Shift 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note 2 0 0 EU ch
130. H2 Set Point Unit No 1 CH3 Set Point Unit No 1 CH4 Set Point Unit No 2 CH1 Set Point Unit No 2 CH2 Set Point Unit No 2 CH3 Set Point Unit No 2 CH4 Set Point Unit No 3 CH1 Set Point Unit No 3 CH2 Set Point Unit No 3 CH3 Set Point Unit No 3 CH4 Set Point Unit No 0 Common End Code Programless Download Settings 5 Programless Download Settings 6 Programless Download Settings 7 Programless Download Settings 8 Programless Download Settings 9 Programless Download Settings 10 Programless Download Settings 1 1 Programless Download Settings 12 Programless Download Settings 13 Programless Download Settings 14 Programless Download Settings 15 Programless Download Settings 16 Note 1 Displayed when the CX Thermo s View Mode is set to Expert Mode 4 Ue Control Linked to a Host Device Section 3 3 Note e The Programmable Terminal and E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable cannot be connected at the same time e When connecting the cable for the Support Software to an EJ1C EDU End Unit either turn OFF the Programmable Terminal s power supply or switch the Programmable Terminal s screen to the system menu PLC The following example settings are for communications with port 2 of a CJ1W SCU41 Serial Communications Unit Port 2 User custom settings Custom settings Port 2 Serial communications mode NT Link 1 N Port 2 Baud rate High speed Port 2 NT Link 1 N maximum unit number 3
131. HPU Functions 3 3 seres 6654254644 nir iaeio OSES OER 152 5 3 1 Auxiliary Output Allocati0MS ooooooooooooooooooooo 152 5 3 2 HFU Internal Buses idan my YT RR eR ES RES 152 109 Programless Communications 9 1 5 1 1 110 Programless Communications Communications with PLCs from OMRON SYSMAC CS CJ Series and Mit subishi Electric MELSEC Q QnA QnAS An AnS FX3UC Series can be per formed without creating ladder programs Using programless communications enables monitoring and changing set tings for the EJ1 by simply reading and writing to PLC memory The EJ1 auto matically performs communications with PLCs so no time consuming communications programming is required Monitoring can be performed for the EJ1 and the settings can be changed by simply reading and writing to memory No time consuming communications programming required PLC Monitor PV Manipulated variable Status Settings SP change Alarm value 1 Alarm value 2 Connectable Devices SYSMAC CS CJ Series Serial Communica tions Unit Serial Communica tions Board CPU Unit Note The read monitor value is written to the PLC memory 2 The HFU automatically performs communications with the PLC Section 5 1 The HFU reads the TC4 monitor value EJ1 TC4 2 PV PV Manipulated variable Manipulated variable
132. J1 Temperature Controller B Thermometer Setting Input Specifications Section 4 1 Two point Shift Method 1 2 3 1 Shift the controller readout at two reference temperatures near room tem perature and near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled Bring the temperature of the control target close to room temperature and close to the set point and check control target tempera ture B and controller readout A 2 Check the temperature of the control target near room temperature B and the controller readout A and calculate the temperature difference as shown below Object temperature B Controller readout A Set the temperature difference as Input Shift 1 and set the controller read out A as Input Value 1 for Input Correction 3 Checkthe temperature of the control target near set point temperature B and the controller readout A and calculate the temperature difference as shown below Object temperature B Controller readout A Set the temperature difference as Input Shift 2 and set the controller read out A as Input Value 2 for Input Correction 4 After you have set the calculated values check controller readout A and control target temperature B 5 Inthis case the two point shift was performed near room temperature and the set point temperature but if you want to improve accuracy near the set point perform the two po
133. JH CS1D CPUL JL IS CJ1G CPUL I PLCs CJ1M CPULILI CJ1G CPUL IL JP CJ1G H CPUL IL OH CS1W SCBL IL 1 V1 CS1W SCUL 1 1 V1 CJ1W SCUL 1 1 V1 CP1H XO DOI IL HL CP1H XALILIL IL LJ CPAH YLUILJIL IL L 1 Communications Commands Reference Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series CS1W SCBL JL V1 CS1W SCULIL 1 V1 CJ1W SCU21L 11 V1 Serial Communications Boards Units Operation Manual XIV external devices including the usage of standard system protocols for OMRON products W336 Describes the use of Serial Communications Unit and Boards to perform serial communications with B G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller Manual ame ata Cons G3ZA Z200 Provides an outline of and describes the features G3ZA 4H203 FLK UTU installation wiring RS 485 serial communications G3ZA 4H403 FLK UTU G3ZA 8H203 FLK UTU G3ZA 8H403 FLK UTU Multi channel Power Controller User s Manual settings and basic function for the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller E Programmable Terminal PT Manuals Wane 1 Gomes S NS Series V083 Provides an outline of and describes the design NS5 SQOL I B V1 V2 NS5 TQOI I B V2 installation maintenance and other basic opera NS5 MQOI I B V2 NS8 TVL IL B V1 V2 tions for the NS series PTs Information is also NS10 TVOI B V1 V2 NS12 TSOL I B V1 V2 included on connecting to hosts and peripheral Programmable Terminals Setup Manual devices
134. LBA Section 4 6 Determining the LBA e Automatic Settings BSIeCUOn MMe The LBA detection time is set automatically by autotuning It is not set automatically for heating cooling control If the optimum LBA detection time is not obtained by autotuning set the LBA Detection Time parameter e Manual Settings To manually set the LBA detection time set the LBA Detection Time pa rameter to twice the LBA reference time given below 1 2 3 1 Set the output to the maximum value 2 Measure the time required for the width of change in the input to reach the LBA band z D asurement time Temperature PV gt penne LBA Band MV 100 Time LBA Detection Time Tm x 2 3 Set the LBA Detection Time parameter to two times the measured time Operating Conditions e The LBA operates when one of the alarm types is set to LBA e Loop burnout alarms are not detected during SP ramping e Loop burnout alarms are not detected during autotuning manual opera tion or while stopped e f the LBA Detection Time LBA Level LBA Band and PID settings are not appropriate alarms may be detected inappropriately or alarms may not be output when necessary e Loop burnout alarms may be detected if unexpectedly large disturbances occur continuously and a large deviation does not decrease e If a loop burnout occurs when the set point is near the ambient tempera ture the temperature
135. LC Memory HFU No 0 HFU No 0 Upload area Upload area HFU No 1 HFU No 1 Upload area Upload area 147 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 Operation and Precautions ll Read Write Period for PLC Memory When more than one HFU is connected communications will be performed in the following order according to communications unit numbers The read write period for PLC memory will thus be relatively long in comparison to the read write period for a 1 1 connection 012 Max communication unit number gt 0 gt 1 B Startup When the power is turned ON communications will be started in order of the communications unit numbers E Power Interruptions If power is interrupted to one HFU communications will still continue for the other HFUs 5 2 2 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLCs Up to eight Advanced Units HFU can be connected to one communications port on a Serial Communications Unit Use the following models when con necting more than one HFU Serial Communications Units Channel 2 of QU71C24N QJ71C24N R4 Channel 2 of A1SJ71QC24N Channel 2 of AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R4 EJ1N HFUA NFL2 EJ1N HFUB NFL2 1 2 3 1 Connect the EJ1 and PLC Always set the communications unit numbers of the HFU in order from O through 7 and set the communications unit numbers of the Basic Units connected to each HFU to a different communications unit number than the HFU m Example If the communications unit number o
136. MS indicator The G3ZA is not connected to Connect the G3ZA to the EJ1 does not flash using an EJ1C CBLAO50 Connecting Cable Pin 7 on SW2 on the EJ1 is Turn ON pin 7 on SW2 on the not ON EJ1 Power was not supplied to the Supply power to the G3ZA G3ZA when the EJ1 was and EJ1 at the same time or started to the G3ZA first Different baud rates are set in Set SW2 on the G3ZA to 3 the G3ZA and EJ1 and reset the EJ1 The unit configuration was Send the Resister Unit Con registered when the G3ZA figuration Reset operation was not connected to the EJ1 command to the EJ1 Basic default condition Unit to which the G3ZA is con nected to clear the Unit con figuration The settings will be valid after the EJ1 is reset The same unit number is set Set the G3ZA unit numbers so for more than one G3ZA that the same number is not used more than once for the same EJ1 Basic Unit The registered G3ZA Unit Send the Resister Unit Con configuration is different from figuration Reset operation the connected G3ZA Unit con command to the EJ1 Basic figuration Unit to which the G3ZA is con nected to clear the Unit con figuration and then reset the EJ1 When the EJ1 starts again send the Register Unit Configuration Register opera tion command to register the connected G3ZA Units in the configuration Note Bit 12 of variable type C4 84 0013 in Device B Status can be used to see if the connected G3ZA Unit configur
137. O e HexerBumuzDsedon o e e MsMama A e e ewerOwmwem2Ddedo Oo e e oyo OwmeSmus OM e Ce note Monitoring only mem SS Ja fe Bente monitoring ny Local SP Motor Je e Be note Mentoring only Remote SP Monitor O See Motigo BarkNo Monitor 6M fe emoe Montingoiy Wi Monitor Hen OM fe Bee note Monitoring only Target value Present Bank Set Point e JJ Present Bank SP Ramp Rise Value e CNN o o e i Present Bank SP Ramp Fall Value BANK SP Upper Limit cH f SP Lower Limit cH f Alarms Present Bank Alarm Value BAN je Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 BANK j Present Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value BANK j Present Bank Alarm Value 2 BANK je o e le o e o j o e o 1 w i i H H H H Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 BANK Inputs Input Digital Filter C C Input Value 1 for Input Correction CH CH Input Shift 1 ICH Input Value 2 for Input Correction C Input Shift 2 252 Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications Appendix Control Present Bank ati Band BANK e e Present Bank Derivative Time Present Bank Manual Reset Value Present Bank Cooling Coefficient Present Bank Dead Band MV Ma PV Error PV LMV at PV Error 0000 MV at Stop MV Upper Limit MV Lower Limit
138. OFF OFF 00 o1 02 O3 04 05 06 o7 O8 O9 10 t1 12 13 14 15 ON ON 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Names of Parts Section 1 1 Setting Switch 2 SW2 Settings EJ111 TC Basic Units Not used OFF ON G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller in operation Use when an HFU is used and Units are distributed See note Note To use an HFU with distributed positioning turn ON pin number 8 on SW2 on the TC Unit connected at the left end of the Block Refer to SECTION 2 Preparations for information on wiring HFU TC4 2 Turn ON pin 8 on SW2 Turn ON pin 8 on SW2 EJ1_ HFU Advanced ui Meaning Not used OFF e EJ1LJ HFULI NFLK OFF RS 485 is selected ON RS 232C is selected e EJ1LJ HFULI NFL2 Not used OFF I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 1 2 I O Configuration and Main Functions 1 2 1 1 0 Configuration TC4 Four channel Basic Unit Main input 1 Control Control output 1 er section Main input 2 Control output 2 Main input 3 Control output 3 Main input 4 Control output 4 G3ZA communications Port A communications Internal bus 1 Port B communications Internal bus 2 Internal bus 3 e Internal device I O are connected via a connector to the adjacent Unit Inside the device TC2 Two channel Basic Unit Main input 1 Control Control output 1 Main input 2 Son Control output 2 Control
139. OFF control e During PD control I 2 0 0 Temperature l l The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function does not operate ONON a fe AN Disturbance Rectification E DS SE peste Band y Disturbance Judgment Width The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function operate Time 4 3 10 Operation during Errors This parameter can be used to select the operation when an error occurred Variable type Setting range Default Operation During Error Selection B 0 Notification only Common continue 1 MV at PV Error 2 Stop control Conditions for use There must be a CT input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective 80 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Note the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON e When setting 1 MV at PV Error is being used set the MV at PV Error in variable type D5 95 For details refer to MV at PV Error on page 75 e If this parameter is set to 2 stop control control will stop when an error occurs and will not be restored automatically even if the error is cleared Execute the Reset Error operation command to restore operation e Each set value determines the operation for different errors as shown in the following table Parametername Ems Operation During Error Selection B CT Heater Overcurrent See
140. OO TC2 HS Alarm 1 Latch H 00000000 Disabled o TC2 H 00000001 Enabled 1 DANI A A A IOS E Heater Overcurrent 1 Latch H 00000000 Disabled ny TC2 H 00000001 Enabled 1 0106 Heater Overcurrent 1 Hysteresis H 00000001 to H 000003E8 0 1 to 100 0 pot Ja O0 tc2 Not used 0200 CT2 Assignment The rest are the same as from CT1 Assignment to 2 Heater Overcurrent 1 Hysteresis 234 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 E5 A5 Can be 0000 AT Calculated Gain H 00000001 to H 00000064 0 1 to 10 0 0 8 Common e eee 0001 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude H 00000032 to H 000001F4 5 0 to 50 0 20 0 Commn e stopped 0002 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function H 00000000 Disabled 0 Common H 00000001 Enabled 1 Not used 0100 Direct Reverse Operation CH1 H 00000000 Reverse operation 0 ch H 00000001 Direct operation 1 0101 SP Ramp Time Unit CH1 H 00000000 Seconds 0 1 ch H 00000001 Minutes 1 0102 AT Hysteresis CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 EU ch See note 0103 Temporary AT Execution Judgement Deviation H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 150 0 EU ch CH1 See note Not used 0106 0107 0108 0105 RT CH1 H 00000000 Disabled 0 ch H 00000001 Enabled 1 SP Tracking CH1 H 00000000 Dis
141. Parameter Validity The conditions for parameter validity that depended on the model and setting status no longer apply Fixed Values for For example the setting range for the target value is fixed to 1 999 to 9 999 Setting Ranges regardless of the input type In other words the setting ranges under the new specifications will not change based on the input type or related parameters For parameters that set ranges with upper and lower limits the specifications now allow the upper and lower limits to be reversed Refer to 4 1 3 Analog Inputs 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point and MV Limiter on page 75 in Section 4 Basic Units TC4 TC2 before using the EJ1 Automatic Offsetting Accompanying changes outlined under Fixed Values for Setting Ranges of Setting Values above there are no longer any restrictions in operations for the target value limiter or target values for changes in the input type Under the new specifica tions there is also no need to change control output assignments when oper ations such as selecting heating and cooling are performed Refer to 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments Heating Cooling Control on page 68 and 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point in Section 4 Basic Units TC4 TC2 before using the EJ1 7 1 1 Communications Specifications Parameter name EDU Port B Transmission path connection Multipoint RS 485 EDU Port B The following communications settings are used Parameter name Setting range Default S
142. Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 Ga ea Montor oo 0000 DeiceASuus see Sas Us page zo O domo fw BE 0002 0002 GonigursiontorASisus See Status Usts on page 249 Common foe 0008 0003 Goniguraion Enor Status See Status Usts on page 249 J gt gt comno 0004 0004 internal Communications Error Status See Status Usts on page240 gt Common fo 0005 0005 vo EnorSialus See Status Ustsonpage 240 common je 0006 oos vo Alarm A Status See Status Listson page 249 Common je 0007 0007 VO Alarm Status See Status Listson page 240 IA common E A AAA AAA AAA Not used oo oos VONotiicaton A Status See Status isison page 20 TA gt oomme J D E AAA AAN A Not used 0008 oo EmorOhamsASuus See Status Ustson page 240 JA omone TJ oor oooF Basic UntExpand Unit Eror ee Status Usis on page 240 J eomme T 0010 ooo Basic UniExpand Unit Alarm See Status Ustson page 249 gt gt comno oo OuipitSiaus eee Status sion page zo J feom e T foots oots Devoe BSiaus See Status Ustson page 240 gt gt comno e CA ANNAN Not used om oco version Mo0wowHowrr gt comme Je 0100 0200 ProcessValue CHi H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 19991o 9999 See note JEU Je ot 020i Channel Status CHI See Status Lists on page240 fe i
143. Programless Upload Set tings The HFU collects monitor values based on these settings for the Units con nected to the HFU and transfers the values to PLC memory 300 See note 1 Reserved Communications Status 1 The limit is 600 parameters for version MARI 2 The final address is 025B for version MAKI e Changing Settings The parameters to be changed are set under the Programless Download Settings The HFU reads the values in a PLC memory area according to these set tings and then refreshes the settings for Units connected to the HFU 300 1 The 0002 Reserved Operation Command Request Bits 0003 Reserved Operation Command Code 0004 Parameter A to be changed 0005 Parameter B to be changed WaF Seenoe2 limit is 600 parameters for version ABI 2 The final address is 025B for version MAKI E Programless Upload Download Settings Use the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software to make the set tings 123 Programless Communications Section 5 1 The parameters for the following variable types can be set Up to 300 set tings can be made for version 1 0 and up to 600 settings can be made for version NAM Programless upload Variable types C4 84 C5 85 D4 94 D5 95 and D6 96 settings Error Status Error Status on page 125 Programless download Variable types D4 94 D5 95 and D6 96 settings e Parameters can be set to Not
144. Selection 0 Ramping SP Channel 1 SP Conditions for use The alarm type must be set to a deviation alarm and the SP Ramp function must be enabled Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 4 4 9 Channel Alarm Status The alarm status can be monitored Variable type Setting range C4 84 Channel Alarm Status Refer to mng range Defaut Channel Status on page 248 Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to O 86 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 4 5 Detecting Current Errors 4 5 1 CT Assignment TC2 This parameter specifies which output s current is being measured Three phase heater burnout detection can also be performed by assigning two CTs to one output Variable type Poremenernamo Sting range Dwisuk CT1 a A I O 0 Disabled m S Control output 1 2 Control output 2 3 Control output 3 4 Control output 4 CT2 Assignment Conditions for use There must be a CT input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped m Examples Example 1 Heater burnout detection is performed on each channel s control output heating Associated by the Associated by the Control CT1 Assignment Output 1 Assignment Channel 1 Control Output Heating CT1 Assignment 1 OUT1 Channel 2 Control Output Heating CT2 Assignment 2 OUT2 Associated by the Control Associated by the Outp
145. Slope Gradient Control G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller Channel 1 sensor input Channel 2 sensor input Channel 3 sensor input Channel 4 sensor input Control value Source channel MV x Slope a Offset b 46 Controlling G3ZA Controllers Connected to Output Devices Section 3 4 3 4 2 Wiring Connect the Temperature Sensors to the input terminals according to the sen sor s input type e Connect the EJ1 and G3ZA with the EJ1C CBLAO50 Cable e Connect the Solid State Relays to the G3ZA s output terminals When using an EJ1L1 TC4 and G3ZA 4H203 FLK wire the circuits as shown in the following diagram G3ZA 4H203 FLK TC4 Control power supply 100 to 240 VAC 50 or 60 Hz Load power supply 100 to 240 VAC 50 or 60 Hz Temperature Sensor EJ1C CBLA050 Cable SW1 settings G3ZA 4H203 FLK SW2 settings G3ZA 4H203 FLK SW2 settings EJ1l TC4A SW1 112 34 SW2 Description SW2 Description Unit number 01 02 03 04 3 Baud rate 57 6 kbps 7 ON Use G3ZA CJ1W CIF11 EJ1C EDU To NS5 Y communications RS 485 port A E Description ON Terminator connected ON 2 wire method ON 2 wire method 24 VDC Not used OFF
146. Special Remarks Execute autotuning AT to make the PID adjustments Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning When the CX Thermo Support Software is being used both EJ1 control and autotuning can be started stopped using operation commands The CX Thermo Support Software starts in Beginner Mode by default When you want to set parameters that are not displayed in Beginner Mode select View View Mode and switch to Expert Mode to enable the advanced set tings In addition the View Mode can be set to normal display or functional group display When functional group display is selected items are grouped by func tion rather than displayed separately as they are in the normal display mode The functional group display makes it easy to set all of the parameters related to a function without overlooking any of the required parameters 37 Multi channel Control Section 3 2 3 2 Multi channel Control 3 2 1 38 Application In this example configuration an EJ1 controls a 4 zone heater plate NS5 Programmable Terminal oZ CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter RS 485 Wafer Cue mnc mM Sensor Heater plate 25 ZINIOOIOOIOOICN ION OOO valina ataata Nese J eS eese es jes en e en aaa Sensor inputs Channels 1 to 4 _ TC4 EDU EJ1 Solid State Relays for single phase heaters e A single Temperature Controller can handle the 4 zone control if a 4 channel Basic Unit EJ1l TC4 is u
147. T2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software s Status Display can be used to monitor the EJ1 status and related status in a directory tree In addition to the status name and details possible causes of errors and their countermea sures are displayed which enables efficient processing of errors 195 Determining the Error from the Status Section 8 3 Status and Addresses Variable type Parameter name C4 C84 0004 Internal Communications Error Status 0006 I O Alarm A Status 0010 0012 Variable type Parameter name C4 C84 Not used Internal Set Point CH1 EA Process Value CH3 Internal Set Point CH3 AS Internal Set Point CH4 Note Refer to Status Lists on page 240 for information on bit data and details for individual statuses 196 Section 8 3 Determining the Error from the Status Status Directory Tree TC4 Device A Status C4 84 0000 Device Error Device Error Status C4 84 0001 Configuration Error Channel Error Not used Expand Communications Error 1 Bits 5 to 7 Not used Bits O to 3 Not used EEPROM Error Calibration Error Setting Value Error Not used Configured Registration Data Error Device Information Data Error to 11 Not used Bit 12 Model Information Mismatching Error Bits 13 to 15 Not used Configuration Error A Status Undefined Expand Unit Not used Too Many Expand Units Expand Unit Failure
148. The control method must be set to ON OFF control The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 B Three position Control In heating cooling control a dead band area can be set where the MV is 096 for both heating and cooling with a dead band 3 position control can be achieved Dead band Hysteresis Heating Hysteresis Cooling ON Heating side Cooling side OFF P A Set point 2 PID Control Two The proportional band P integral time I and derivative time D must be degrees of freedom set for 2 PID control PID E PID Settings When the control characteristics are unknown perform autotuning AT When AT is executed the optimum PID constants for the set point at that time are set automatically When the control characteristics are already known the PID parameters can be set directly to adjust control The PID parameters are set with the Propor tional Band P Integral Time lI and Derivative Time D parameters Note Refer to 4 3 8 Tuning for details on autotuning Variable type Setting range Default DO 90 Proportional Band BANK 0 1 to 999 9 EU See note 1 Integral Time BANK 0 to 3999 Seconds Derivative Time BANK 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control Note 1
149. XOR is taken of the next byte of the CRC register and the message the result is returned to the CRC register and the procedure is repeated from step 3 Frames Section 7 2 7 The result the value in the CRC register is placed in the lower byte of the message Example of Appending the Result If the calculated CRC value is H 1234 this is appended as follows to the command frame Slave Function address code Data CRC 16 PT D EAE eee H 34 H 12 Bytes 1 1 2 CRC 16 calculation range 7 2 2 Response Frames Normal Response Frames Slave Function ICI address code Data CRC 16 Bytes 1 DM MN DNE 9 l CRC 16 calculation range Error Response Frames Slave Function Error address code code CRC 16 Bytes 1 1 1 2 CRC 16 calculation range Slave address The unit number that was specified in the command frame is returned here This is the unit number of the responding EJ1 Function code The function code that was received is returned here In an error response frame H 80 is added to the value to indicate that this is an error response Example Received function code H 03 Function code in error response frame H 83 Error code An end code that indicates the error CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check These two bytes are a check code calculated from the slave address through the end of the data in hexadecimal No Response In the following cases the received command is not processed and a
150. Y UN ain 2 NU D cr ED zu SD 0 E gt A Computer NIU dia NU A NOD J Fj SB ge a Le Port B is used for distributed e e Albo da E la a ort B is used for distribute Las as Jas placement a MAA al AA 107 NO RO gt ES O O O GG CD QD QD CD SOSOPO CD Co CD CD QD CD Go Gb QD CD CD CD SOSA Sopas al al mg lw oq 0 OOOOOO OPIO OOOOOO OOOO GG CO D CD OD SGOLVODO O ES CORP TO G3ZA G3ZA G3ZA 27 Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 2 4 1 Connection Precautions Restrictions on the Number of Units that Can Be Connected e Unit numbers O to 63 can be used for EJ1 HFU and EJ1 TC4 TC2 Units e Up to 16 Units including the HFU can be connected side by side Note EDU Units are not counted in the number of Units that can be connected Precautions When Using e One HFU can control up to 16 TC4 TC2 Units an HFU e The unit numbers of the TCA TC2 Units can be set to between 0 and 31 e To connect 16 TCA TC2 Units Communications Cables must be used to distribute Unit positioning because the maximum number of Units that can be connected horizontally will be exceeded e When using Communications Cables to distribute TC4 TC2 Unit position ing connect the cables to port B on the End Units e f distributed positioning is used for an EJ1 power must be supplied sepa rately to the terminal block on the End Units Note When using distributed positioning turn ON power to the distributed Units first or turn ON powe
151. a tion has been regis tered The cable connecting the Replace the Connecting G3ZA and EJ1 is broken Cable between the G3ZA and EJ1 208 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Measurement Errors Section 8 5 8 5 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Measurement Errors Error in Measured Temperature or Temperature Cannot Be Measured pH Possible cause Countermeasure Connection The thermometer polarity or connected terminals are wrong Rewire correctly A thermometer that cannot be used with the EJ1 has been Change to a compatible thermometer connected The thermometer has burnt out short circuited or deterio Replace with a better quality thermometer rated No thermometer is connected e Connect a thermometer A compensating conductor applicable to the thermocouple e Directly connect a thermocouple with a long lead has not been used Use an applicable compensating conductor A device using metal other than a thermocouple or compen Connect a device specifically for thermocouples sating conductor has been connected between the thermo couple and EJ1 terminals The connection terminal screws are loose and the connec Tighten the screws securely tion is imperfect The thermocouple lead or compensating conductor is too Use a thicker compensating conductor long and is affected by the conductor resistance e Change the wiring location and shorten the w
152. abled 0 H 00000001 Enabled 1 f 9 PID OnOff CH1 H 00000000 2 PID control 0 ch H 00000001 ON OFF control 1 Output Mode Selection CH1 H 00000000 Standard control 0 ch H 00000001 Heating cooling control 1 p pe Not used 0200 mm Direct Reverse Operation CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 BENE Note The SP Tracking CH2 parameter is supported only by the TC4 0300 Direct Reverse Operation CH3 Note The SP Tracking CH3 parameter cannot be used TC4 0400 Direct Reverse Operation CH4 Note The SP Tracking CH4 parameter cannot be used ITCA Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O imal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 o b Q 235 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit No Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 Enabled Eo pes pe Enable H 00000000 Disabled 0 Common BO after pss E 00000001 Enabled 1 Ese band ME oh After Power ON H 00000000 Continue 0 Common H 00000001 Stop 1 H 00000002 Manual mode 2 0003 Operation During Error Selection B H 00000000 Notification only Continue 0 Common H 00000001 MV at PV error 1 H 00000002 Control Stop 2 A IBGE SD H 00000001 Modbus 1 0021 Port B Communications Baud Rate TC4 TC2 Notused A used Common eg
153. ace the Unit A Unit is not connected correctly Check Unit models and the order of connection The registered Unit configura Restore the registered Unit configuration or re PWR X Green lit tion does not match the actual register the configuration Unit configuration Basic Units RUN Not lit only ERR CT Red lit The same unit number is set for Correct the G3ZA unit number settings and then more than one connected G3ZA cycle the power supply ALM Not lit Basic Units only There is an error in a connected Refer to the G3ZA User s Manual Cat No G3ZA Basic Units only Z200 and take the required countermeasures In addition to the above the status of the following indicators can be used to determine the cause of and countermeasures for errors TCA TC2 Status Possible causes Countermeasure There is an error in a channel Read status to determine the channel that has ld Green flashing that is currently running an error and then determine the cause from the status of the ERR and ALM indicators There is an input error or a Check the wiring for the input or remote SP remote SP input error input to be sure it is wired correctly not broken and not shorted Also check the input type An error has occurred for which Read status to determine the nature of the error the Operation During Error and take appropriate measures La Red flashing Selection B parameter is set to
154. alue 2 Monitor The rest are the same as Heater Current Value 1 Monitor 0101 0221 Leakage Current Value 1 Monitor H 00000000 to H 0000044C 0 0 to 110 0 Pl a o TC 222 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress V B ior oszkr crrcomi nies ELTON CRL A ES 0102 GSZA1 CHS Control Variable Monitor H o000000019HroooosEB 0 0 0 700 0 00 NUM e 0103 G3ZA1 0H4 Control Variable Montor H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 0 100 0 00 NUM e 0104 GSZA1 CHS Control Variable Montor H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 010 100 0 oo NUM Je 0105 GSZA1 CHE Control Variable Montor H 00000000 to H 000008E8 0 010 100 0 00 NUM Je 0105 G3ZA1 0H7 Control Variable Montor H 00000000 t H 000003E8 0 010 100 0 foo w NUM e 0107 G3ZA1 CH8 Control Variable Monitor H 000000001o H 000003E8 0 010 100 0 oo mum e moj ezacemsas RA WM e mo Gazat chastus a e fora GMAr OCHoSmus NM mej eza cm Status e m e moej GxM OsSms A f o je moj GmAr OHeSmus Mf mc GmAr OWSms o o a e moej ezma cn Status WM e GSZA CTiHesterON Current Monitor A F
155. ame Configuration 158 623 BUN Samim hex ato ae as EN 160 GI PDUSC E nn cv xen oe ete kek l ae oe Ave he C 160 6 3 2 Variable Type and Address 20 0 cece eens 160 6 33 Numberof Elements RE e 160 6 3 4 Communications Data 0 0 0 161 6 3 5 List of FINS min Command ServiceS o oooooooooooooo 161 6 4 Detailed Description of Services 0 0 cc eee eens 162 6 4 1 Read from Variable Area 0 0 0 0 cc eee 162 6 4 2 Write to Variable Area 0 0 eee 163 6 4 3 Composite Read from Variable Area ooooooooooooo 164 6 4 4 Composite Write to Variable At8a o oooooooooooooo 165 6 4 5 Composite Registration Read oooooooooooooooooooo 166 6 4 6 Composite Read Registration 0 0 0 0 167 6 4 7 Composite Read Registration Confirmation 168 6 4 8 Controller Attribute Read oooooooooooooooooooooo 169 6 4 9 Controller Status Read ooooooooooooooooooooooo 170 6 4 10 JBehoback Tests iaa iria AENA 171 6 4 11 Operation Commands 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 172 155 Communications Settings Section 6 1 6 1 Communications Settings Communications are programmed on the host computer Descriptions of com munications in this manual are therefore written from the viewpoint of the host computer For example references to reading and writing mean reading data from the EJ1 to the host computer and writing data from the host comput
156. ameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove the offset during settling in P or PD control Variable type Setting range DO 90 Manual Reset Value BANK 0 0 to 100 0 5 Conditions for use The control method must be set to standard control and 2 PID control and the integral time must be set to 0 Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks E 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point Note These parameters set the set point Variable type Setting range DO 90 Set point BANK 1999 to 9999 EU 0 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks Set the set point so that it is within the input range as well as the set point lim iter range If the set point is out of range the internal set point actually used for control will be limited to a value within the input range and set point limiter range Bl Set Point Limiter Note These parameters apply a limit to the set point s setting range so that the con trol subject does not reach an abnormal temperature Variable type Setting range Default D5 95 SP Upper Limit Channel 1999 to 9999 EU 9999 SP Lower Limit Channel 1999 to 9999 EU 1999 Conditions for use No special conditions The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Set the SP Upper and Lower Limits within the input range and also set the SP Upper Limit SP Lower Limit If the SP Lower Limit SP
157. an HFU Even if an HFU is used bus inputs cannot be used for Basic Units con nected to the RS 485 communications lines using distributed positioning Set using bus output assignments Set using bus output assignments Set using auxiliary output assignments Set using bus input assignments HFU TC2 TC4 EDU 2 BUS1 and BUS2 are connected to SUB1 and SUB2 on the EDU 3 HFU and TC2 event inputs and auxiliary outputs can be linked 4 Signals output to the bus can also be read at the outputting Unit itself The following diagrams show the parameters that can be set in the Bus Input 1 to 3 Assignment and Bus Output 1 to 3 Assignment parameters Refer to the Example on page 104 when setting parameters The settable parameters include those for all channels and those for individual channels 1 Bus inputs cannot be used if a Basic Unit is used without an HFU Even if an HFU is used Bus Input cannot be used for TC Units connected to the RS 485 communications lines using distributed positioning 2 Set the bus settings correctly in each Unit so that there are no conflicts in operation within the EJ1 system Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 E Bus Input Assignments TC4 TC2 B us input 1 Settable parameters Bus input 2 Bus input 3 e Bus inputs 2 and 3 can be set in the same way All channels Disabled
158. and settings required for communications and PT operation Describes the functions of NS series PTs includ ing screen configurations object functions and host communications for the PT NS Series V073 NS5 SQOL_1 B V1 V2 NS5 TQOL1 B V2 NS5 MQOL1 B V2 NS8 TVL IL B V1 V2 NS10 TVOL B V1 V2 NS12 TSOL1 B V1 V2 Programmable Terminals Programming Manual NSJ Series W452 Provides the following information about the NSJ NSJ5 TQL IL B G5D series NSJ Controllers NSJ5 SQUILI B G5D Overview and features da GEB Designing the system configuration NSJ12 TSLIL B G5D Installation and wiring NSJ5 TQLILI B M3D I O memory allocations N9J5 SQL IL B M3D Troubleshooting and maintenance UD HE UJ UJ TUD NSJ8 TVLIL M3D Use this manual in combination with the following NSJ Series Operation Manual manuals SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual W339 SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual W393 SYSMAC CS CJ Series Programming Manual W394 and NS V1 V2 Series Setup Manual V083 NSH Series Provides an outline of and describes the design NSH5 SQROOB V2 installation maintenance and other basic opera Hand held Programmable Terminal Operation Manual tions for the NSH series NSH5 Hand held Pro grammable Terminal Information is also included on features system configuration wiring I O memory allocations and troubleshooting NS Series Describes how to display external video images or NS CA002 analog RGB
159. and then enters it again For example with a lower limit alarm the process value will normally be below the set point i e within the alarm range when the power supply is turned ON causing an alarm to be output If the lower limit alarm with standby sequence is selected an alarm will not be output until the process value increases above the alarm set value i e until it leaves the alarm range and then falls back below the alarm value Alarm type Lower limit alarm with standby sequence Alarm value o0 L p hysteresis A Alarms Standby sequence canceled with standby sequence A p 3 Alarms O EN without standby sequence E Restarting the Standby Sequence e f an alarm is output the standby sequence is canceled but the standby sequence will start again after any of the following operations Restart conditions When control starts including power ON or when the alarm value upper lower limit alarm value or input shift value upper lower limit temperature input shift value is changed e When the set point is changed e When the bank is switched e When the alarm type is changed SP changed M Alarm value t after change Alarm hysteresis O Standby sequence canceled O Standby sequence restarted 4 4 5 Alarm Latch The alarm latch can be used to keep an alarm ON once it
160. arately for each channel e Control outputs are pulse voltage outputs e Both screw terminals and screw less clamp terminals are available e Terminal blocks can be detached and attached e One TC2 Unit controls temperature on 2 channels e Multi input is supported for thermocouple platinum resistance thermome ter or analog input e The type of input can be set separately for each channel e Control outputs are pulse voltage outputs or current outputs e Connect a current transformer CT to use the heater burnout and heater overcurrent alarms here are two event inputs Any of the following can be used by setting event input assignments Run stop auto manual remote SP local SP and bank switching e Both screw terminals and screw less clamp terminals are available e Terminal blocks can be detached and attached e An HFU monitors the Basic Units and collects data e Up to sixteen Basic Units can be connected to one HFU e Data can be exchanged between the EJ1 and PLCs using programless communications e With version 1 0 up to 300 data items can be read from a PLC to the EJ1 and up to 300 data items can be written from the EJ1 to a PLC With ver sion NAM up to 600 data items can be read from a PLC to the EJ1 and up to 600 data items can be written from the EJ1 to a PLC e OMRON CS CJ series PLCs and Mitsubishi Q QnA QnAS An AnS FX3UC series PLCs can be connected Version or higher must be used for An AnS FX3UC serie
161. are shifted For example make the following settings if you want to increase the tempera ture by 1 2 C e Input Shift 1 2 Input Shift 2 2 1 2 It is not necessary to set the Input Value 1 for Input Correction or Input Value 2 for Input Correction parameters Leave these parameters set to their default settings When the measured value after the setting is 200 C the process value will become 201 2 C Temperature Upper H y limit After shifting Before shifting Input shift value Lower limit Input A linear compensation can be applied by setting the Input Value 1 for Input Correction in Input Shift 1 and independently setting the Input Value 2 for Input Correction in Input Shift 2 If different shift values are set for Input Shift 1 and Input Shift 2 the slope of the line may be different before and after apply ing the input shift Display y Input Shift 2 After shifting Before shifting Input Shift 1 y Input Input Value 1 Input Value 2 for Input Correction for Input Correction Measure the temperature at two points the present value displayed by the EJ1 and the location control target that needs to be displayed Preparations 1 Setthe input type to match the sensor being used 2 Prepare a thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the con trol target as shown in the following diagram so that a 2 point shift can be performed A E
162. arm OFF ON The G3ZA6 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 6 Expand Unit 7 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA7 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Expand Unit 8 Alarm The G3ZA8 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bs Ntued OO S Brio Ntued OO CON CTS S Brio Norte Brig Ntued O Bri Norte Biss Nouse O 1 1 LS 246 Status Lists Appendix Output Status C4 84 0012 Bit position BN Bit description Meaning Bit O Control Output 1 See OFF The control output 1 status can be checked note Control Output 2 See The control output 2 status can be checked note OFF OFF B nouse Bts nousa B6 Nouse B7 nousa BS Nouse Bro nousa Brio Nouse J Bett Notused Bii Nouse Oooo o Bes nousa SS B4 Nouse Oooo Bis nouse Note Not supported by Temperature Controllers with linear outputs Device B Status C4 84 0013 Bit position Ld Bit description Bit O Save RAM 1 No error Error Power was turned OFF while saving RAM1 and not all data was registered Bit 1 Save RAM 2 No error Error Power was turned OFF while saving RAM2 and not all data was registered Bit 2 Save Control Parame No error Error Power was turned OFF during parameter registra ters tion after autotuning was completed and not all data was registered Bit 3 Registration of unit con No error Error Power was turned OFF dur
163. ase Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 puede TE pem 01C7 p G3ZA1 CH8 Soft Increase Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 pose ie m3 01C8 PE G3ZA1 CH1 Soft Decrease Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 poe as 1e pe 01C9 p G3ZA1 CH2 Soft Decrease Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 pre pr qe 01CA B G3ZA1 CH3 Soft Decrease Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 GM NEN A O 01CB p G3ZA1 CH4 Soft Decrease Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 pe Te e a eR Y 230 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit t pie Category Add Address TC4 ype ress TC2 DA Can be 01CC G3ZA1 CH5 Soft Decrease Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 S NUM 9A changed V2 during 01CD G3ZA1 CH6 Soft Decrease Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 S NUM operation V2 01CE p G3ZA1 CH7 Soft Decrease Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 poe ES 0 01CF EE G3ZA1 CH8 Soft Decrease Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 po e e qe A 01DO E G3ZA1 CH1 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 pec old 01D1 G3ZA1 CH2 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 96 NUM ui old 01D2 E G3ZA1 CH3 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 AES old 01D3 E G3ZA1 CH4 Control Switch MV Thresh H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0
164. ater Current Updated Hold The heater current monitor has not been updated Hold because the control output ON time is less than 100 ms Bis owsa O B6 Nowa oO B7 Motu pte Nowa OOO B9 Norte Bo Nouws OOO S EE EE EIN NEN GNE NEM HA C NENNEN EE MEE Error Channel A Status C4 84 000B 1 Ba Ntued O S o Bs Nowa O S B6 Nouws J S B7 Note pte Notused O S Bs owsa OO S Bo nousa O O S Bet Nowa OO S S Brio Norte Brig Nowa OO S Bri Nouws OO S Bs Nouse A 1 ooo 245 Status Lists Appendix Basic Unit Expand Unit Error Status C4 84 000F Bit position NEG IE Bit description Meaning o 1 Bis Noted J S B9 Nuwed O O S Brio Noted S Bin mouse O Biz Noted a LS Bii mouse J S Bii Noted a LS Basic Unit Expand Unit Alarm Status C4 84 0010 Bit position Nl Bit description Bit O Expand Unit 1 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA1 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 1 Expand Unit 2 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA2 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 2 Expand Unit 3 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA3 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 3 Expand Unit 4 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA4 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 4 Expand Unit 5 Alarm OFF ON The G3ZA5 has a heater burnout overcurrent or SSR short circuit Bit 5 Expand Unit 6 Al
165. ation in a cooling control system which performs the opposite operation Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 Direct Reverse Operation 0 Reverse operation Channel 1 Direct operation Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 67 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Heating Cooling To perform heating cooling control assign the control output cooling function Control to one of the outputs For example when you want to perform heating cooling control with channel 1 assign channel 1 control output cooling to one of the outputs Refer to 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments for details on assigning the control output for cooling e The Cooling Coefficient and Dead Band parameters must be set for this PID control in addition to the Proportional Band P Integral Time I and Derivative Time D parameters E Cooling Coefficient If the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants the cooling coefficient can be used to adjust the propor tional band P for the control output assigned to cooling Use this to achieve balanced control between the heating side and cooling side The proportional bands P for the control outputs assigned to the heating cooling sides can be calculated using the following equations
166. ations specifications 156 178 composite read from variable area 164 composite read registration 167 composite read registration confirmation 168 composite registration read 166 composite write to variable area 165 CompoWay F 158 Configuration Error A Status HFU 251 Illegal Unit Arrangement 251 Configuration Error A Status TCA TC2 242 Expand Unit Connection Fault 242 Expand Unit Failure 242 Too Many Expand Units 242 Undefined Expand Units 242 Configuration Error B Status TC4 TC2 242 Expand Unit 1 Error 242 Expand Unit 2 Error 242 Expand Unit 3 Error 242 Expand Unit 4 Error 242 Expand Unit 5 Error 242 Expand Unit 6 Error 242 Expand Unit 7 Error 242 Expand Unit 8 Error 242 connectable devices 110 connecting more than one HFU 145 control output assignments 57 control output method 58 controller attribute read 169 controller status read 170 cooling coefficient 68 crimp terminals 19 CT Current Transformer 89 256 CT assignment TC2 87 Current Transformer 218 Current Transformer CT 96 97 CX Programmer 113 D D derivative time 66 dead band 68 decimal point position xvii Device A Status HFU 250 Configuration Error 250 Device Error 250 External RAM Error at Operation 250 Internal Communications Error 250 Programless Link Error 250 Device A Status TC4 TC2 241 Channel Error 241 Configuration Error 241 Device Error 241 Expand Communications Error 241 I O
167. ay as changing the set point In this case operation is carried out with the process value regarded as the set point before the change was made SP ramp operation at startup depends on the relationship between the pro cess value and the set point as shown in the following diagrams SP PV lt SP SP PV gt SP Rising Falling SP ramp SP ramp SP Process value SP Process value l i Time Time Power ON Power ON Restrictions during e Autotuning is started after the SP ramp operation has been completed SP Ramp Operation e The SP ramp operation will continue even if operation is switched to man ual mode e When control is stopped or an error occurs the SP ramp function will be disabled 4 3 6 Remote SP The remote SP function uses another channel s input as the set point for con trol To operate the function set the Remote SP Enable parameter to Enable and select the remote SP with an event input or operation command 71 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 TC2 CH1 TC2 CH2 Channel 3 Remote SP of channel 1 TC4 CH1 CH2 TC4 CH3 CH4 Channel 4 Remote SP of channel 2 Selected bank s Process value SP Process value If remote SP mode is enabled the process value operates as the remote SP input Local SP Hemote SP lt Switch with an event input or operation command SP Ramp Control Internal SP Manipulated variable
168. ber SELBE co cw eee recia reseca 179 7 1 3 Other Communications SettidgS o oooooooooooooooooo 179 7 1 4 Send Data Wait Time 0 0 00 179 SA a arses oe ce eee nn 180 2 2 1 Command Frames 344463260 05004 55004060 5464i0404 44560444 180 122 2 RESPONSE Trames a ous edo een senha sana cs Ganon eee 181 7 3 Function Codes usiosrdcini n iaa 182 14 Natlable ATCAS o va ace dice d dco ER Uo dp d e diras e eed add 183 7 4 1 Addresses 2 553 4656 9 dd 2 8 EAE OS EEE Sad oae dad curd uie ds 183 7 4 2 Number of Elements 0 ccc ee eens 183 7 4 3 Communications Data 0 0 0 0 cee 183 7 5 Detailed Description of Services 1 2 0 0 ccc eee eens 184 7 5 1 Multiple Read from Variable rea o oooooooooooooo 184 7 5 2 Multiple Write to Variable r8a oooooooooooooo 185 7 5 3 Single Write to Variable rea o o ooooooooooooooooo 186 T4 BHohobdck Test cuerdas ae a 189 177 Communications Settings Section 7 1 7 1 Communications Settings Communications are programmed on the host computer Descriptions of com munications in this manual are therefore written from the viewpoint of the host computer For example references to reading and writing mean reading data from the EJ1 to the host computer and writing data from the host computer to the EJ1 The EJ1 uses different communications specifications from existing products to improve communications operability
169. ble Type F0 BO Used to set the programless communications protocol Variable type Setting Monitor values Derat Programless Communica 0 Not used tions Protocol Common 1 Not used 2 NT Link 1 N Connectable PLCs SYSMAC CS CJ Series Not used ANA AnU CPU Common Commands Connectable PLCs MELSEC An AnS FX3UC Series MC protocol format 5 Connectable PLCs MELSEC Q QnAS Series Conditions for use No special conditions 125 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Note Reset the EJ1 to enable settings B Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area Variable Type F0 BO0 Used to set the area in PLC memory that will be allocated to the parameters set with the Programless Upload Download Settings Set this parameter according to the Programless Communications Protocol e SYSMAC CS CJ Series PLCs Set value Applicable areas by CPU Unit CJ1H CPU67H CJ1H CPU66H CJ1H CPU65H CJ1G CPU44H CJ1M CJ1G CPU45H CPU43H CPU42H sia DM Applicable Applicable Applicable Aopicabe Aopicabe ev Aenean nicae cane JR 3 Em2 Applicable Applicable Applicable 4 EMS Applicable Applicable e me 5 EM4 Aepicebie Applicable J e EM Applcable Applicable e 7 EMG Applicable Applicable e Jen applicable o Ema applicable e oo 10 Emo applicable ee e oo m Ema applicable fee f E A 12 Ema applicable e E ia Em
170. bleshooting items for connection and setting problems are the same as for overshooting and under shooting above NENNEN Possible cause Countermeasure Procedure The heater s heating capacity is too large for the heating Use a heater with a heating capacity suitable for the control capacity of the control target target There is periodic disturbance which changes the heating e Change to an environment with as little periodic distur capacity of the control target bance Executing autotuning AT e Hunting will not occur once autotuning has been completed 211 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Output Errors Section 8 7 8 7 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Output Errors No Control Outputs No Alarm Outputs Posse ase Countermeasure Connection Measured temperature is wrong Perform the action outlined in 7 5 The load polarity or connected terminals are wrong e Rewire correctly A load exceeding the output rating is connected e Reduce the load to within the rating e Get the Unit repaired if it is malfunctioning No power supply for the load is connected to the transistor Use a power supply suitable for the output rating and load outputs The polarity of the load power supply for transistor outputs is Rewire correctly incorrect Setting Set the Operation After Power ON parameter to Stop e Execute a RUN start operation operation command after
171. ccess Fixed to 00 3 No of Registered Data Items Variable Type Read Address Bit Posi tion Registered data length No of registered data items For double word 8 digit variable type 20 max 0014H For word 4 digit variable type 4 Response Codes Response code Errormame Cause 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 1100 Parameter error Bit position is not 00 Write data is out of setting range 2201 Operation error 2201 The command cannot be executed during operation 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 7013 7013 Operation error 7013 The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received 7014 Operation error 7014 The command cannot be executed during backup 7015 Operation error 7015 The command cannot be executed during reset including startup 7041 Operation error 7041 The command cannot be executed in manual operation mode 7042 Operation error 7042 The command cannot be executed in tun ing mode 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 167 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 7 Composite Read Registration Confirmation This service reads the contents of the registration for a composite read from a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SR
172. cify two times the number of elements 4 Response Codes Function Error Cause code code H 90 H 01 Function code error A function code that is not supported was specified Variable address error The write start address is not correct H O3 Variable data error e The command is not long enough e The number of elements and number of data items do not agree e The number of elements times two does not agree with byte count e The write data exceeded the setting range e An attempt was made to write to a read only variable type H 04 Operation error e The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received e The command cannot be executed dur ing backup e The command cannot be executed dur ing reset including startup e The command cannot be executed in tuning mode H10 Normalend The service was processed normally 185 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 Command Response Example The following command writes the set point of channel 1 Slave address H O1 Write start address H 0240 Write data H 03E8 to write a set point of 100 0 C Command 01 10 0240 0001 02 03E8 8BEE CRC 16 Response 01 10 0240 0001 01A5 CRC 16 7 5 3 Single Write to Variable Area Command Response 186 This service either writes data to the variable area or executes one of the operation commands given in the table in 2 Write Data below Function code Slave Write
173. correct temperature is indicated Always turn ON the power supply at least 30 minutes before starting temperature control 3 Avoid using the Temperature Controller near a radio television set or other wireless device Its use would result in reception disturbance xii Preparations for Use Be sure to thoroughly read and understand the manual provided with the product and check the fol lowing points Check point Deis OoOo o OO Purchasing the product Product appearance After purchase check that the product and packaging are not dented or otherwise damaged Damaged internal parts may prevent optimum control Product model and Make sure that the purchased product meets the required specifica specifications tions Setting the Unit Product installation Provide sufficient space around the product for heat dissipation Do location not block the vents on the product Terminal wiring Do not subject the terminal screws to excessive stress force when tightening them Make sure that there are no loose screws after tightening terminal screws to the specified torque of 0 40 to 0 56 N m Be sure to confirm the polarity for each terminal before wiring the ter minal block and connectors Power supply inputs Wire the power supply inputs correctly Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the internal circuits Operating environment Ambient temperature The ambient operating temperature for the product i is 10 to 55 C with
174. ctive manuals and Board SCB Unit SCU wir wire the connection correctly See Related Manuals on page xiv The port C communications Turn OFF pin 8 on the HFU settings are set to RS 232C switch 2 SW2 to set to RS 485 Connect the SCU RS 485 port to the EJ1 RS 485 port Connection ing is incorrect PC The Serial Communications SCB SCU Board SCB Unit SCU RS 232C port is connected to the RS 485 EJ1 EJ1 RS 485 port Alternatively connect the RS 422A Converter to the RS 232C port to convert to RS 485 then connect to the EJ1 RS 485 port The EJ1 programless commu nications parameters are incorrect Refer to 5 1 Programless Communi cations in SECTION 5 Advanced Unit HFU Functions and check the set tings SCB SCU CJ1W CIF11 RS 422A Converter The Serial Communications Same as above RS 485 EJ Board SCB Unit SCU com munications settings are incorrect Connection port Connection port SOU EJ1 Port C HFU RS 485 207 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 G3ZA Use the following table when the EJ1 cannot communicate with an G3ZA con nected to it Status Possible cause Countermeasure Communications are Power is not supplied to the Supply power to the G3ZA not possible between G3ZA from the power supply termi the G3ZA and EJ1 nals and reset the EJ1 the CO
175. d circuit Waveform shaping circuit Waveform shaping circuit Waveform shaping circuit Edd Edd circuit Waveform shaping circuit Microcomputer AR oo Drive Si ees voltage Control output 1 circuit ED See note 2 Drive ads voltage r erum mum mm m m a m i m Y E E D o E o Es x o O o c E 9 O a A ung Gs Dn ee Functional isolatior M 2 rr E 1 The CT inputs are not present on EJ1 Controllers with linear outputs 2 These are current outputs on EJ1 Controllers with linear outputs Internal Block Diagrams Section 1 3 HFU A A A A Switch ae y 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 X i i Drive Transistor o i Waveform Dri T E rive ransistor T igi shapin Coit VEL Auxiliary output 2 E cita NE T outputs Q YES I Waveform Drive Transistor shapin idis ili SUE Microcomputer ENE A outputs C Auxiliary output 3 Waveform E shaping circuit Waveform E shaping Event input 1 circuit Event input EE Event input y circuit Event input circuit Y Event input y circuit Event input 2 Event input 3 Event input 4 20 O a e or PA 8 68 S o nn or O gt c x 3 3 O c st cO c Lom d DA Sueno mes emm Em E elem ei m E mms s m iom n f Port C com M SRAM munications 1 Port C communications circul
176. d scaling can be performed as needed by the control application e The Scaling Upper Limit Scaling Lower Limit and Decimal Point Position parameters are used for scaling These parameters cannot be used when a temperature input type is selected e The Scaling Upper Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the upper limit value of input and the Scaling Lower Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lower limit value of input The Decimal Point Position parameter specifies the num ber of digits below the decimal point e The following example shows scaling of an analog input 4 to 20 mA After scaling the humidity can be read directly In this case the decimal point is set for 1 digit below the decimal point Display humidity Upper limit 95 0 Lower limit 10 096 Input mA 52 Setting Input Specifications Section 4 1 Variable type Parametername Setting range Default EO AO Scaling Upper Limit Channel 1999 to 9999 1000 See note Scaling Lower Limit Channel 1999 to 9999 a Decimal Point Position Channel 0 no decimal point 1 1 kkk kk kk Zoe 3 Kk kkk Conditions for use The input type must be set to analog input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Always set the Scaling Upper Limit gt Scaling Lower Limit If the Scaling Lower Limit gt Scaling Upper Limit the larger val
177. d by at least the LBA Band the loop burnout alarm will remain OFF e The process value is within the LBA Level between 3 and 4 and thus loop burnout alarms will not be detected The loop burnout alarm will remain OFF e f the process value is outside the LBA Level between 4 and 5 and the control deviation is not reduced by at least the LBA Band value within the LBA Detection Time the loop burnout alarm will turn ON e f the control deviation is reduced in the area between 5 and 6 i e the set point is approached and the control deviation is reduced by at least the LBA Band value the loop burnout alarm will turn OFF e f the control deviation is reduced in the area between 6 and 7 i e the set point is approached and the control deviation is reduced by less than the LBA Band value the loop burnout alarm will turn ON Variable type Setting range Default E3 A3 LBA Detection Time Channel 0 to 9999 Seconds o LBA Level Channel 0 1 to 999 9 EU See note 2 LBA Band Channel 0 0 to 999 9 EU 3 0 See note 2 Conditions for use The alarm type must be set to 12 Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks 98 Using the Loop Break Alarm
178. d stop Pro grammable Terminal communica tions Move the Programmable Terminal to the System Screen and set the com munications destination for the com munications port on the Communications Setting Screen to Temperature Controller and the baud rate to 38 4 kbps 203 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 204 Status Possiblecause Possiblecause Countermeasure The Smart Active Part SAP There is no power supply to the Supply power from the EDU power does not communicate with EJ1 supply terminal The Programmable Terminal Refer to the Programmable Terminal the EJ1 connection is incorrect RS 422A Converter and EJ1 manu als and wire the connection correctly The SAP is not compatible with Use a SAP for the EJ1 the EJ1 NS series The SAP is not for direct con Use a SAP for direct Programmable nection Terminal connection CJ1W CIF11 The RS 422A switch settings Hefer to the product manual and RS 422A Converter are incorrect make the correct switch setting for the communications conditions The Programmable Terminal Set the PT s baud rate the same as communications conditions are the port B baud rate different from the EJ1 communi cations settings Hint The EJ1 baud rate is set under the Port B Communications Baud Rate parameter e The available baud rate settings are 9 6 kbps default 19 2 kbps 38 4 kbps 57 6 kbps and 115
179. d vertically to the ground 19 Always turn OFF the power supply before wiring the product replacing the product or changing the product configuration 20 Attach the enclosed cover seal to the connector opening on the left end Unit during installation 21 Do not use port B on the End Unit when using port C on the HFU xi Precautions for Correct Use O Installation 1 Do not connect an End Unit directly to an HFU 2 Always connect an End Unit to the right side of the Basic Units 3 Always connect the HFU to the left side of the Basic Units 4 The EJ1 cannot be used linked to a CJ series PLC 5 Use the EJ1G L 1L for gradient temperature control Use the EJ1N LIL for any other type of temperature control 6 When removing the terminal block to replace the Unit be sure to confirm that the new Unit is the same as the Unit that is being replaced O Service Life 1 Use the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges Temperature 10 to 55 C with no icing or condensation Humidity 25 to 85 When the Temperature Controller is incorporated in a control panel make sure that the controller s ambient temperature and not the panel s ambient temperature does not exceed 55 C 2 The service life of electronic devices like the Temperature Controller is determined by the service life of internal electronic components Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature the higher the temperature the shor
180. deviation in a steady state may be less than the LBA level preventing detection of the loop burnout e f the set point is so high or low that it cannot be reached even with a sat urated manipulated variable a temperature deviation may remain even in a steady state and a loop burnout may be detected Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes an increase in tem perature while control is being applied to increase the temperature e g a solid state relay short circuit fault Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes a decrease in tem perature while control is being applied to decrease the temperature e g a heater burnout fault 99 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 4 7 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 4 7 1 Bank Function Up to 4 banks can be created with the following parameters registered inde pendently e Set point e Proportional Band Integral Time e Derivative Time SP Ramp Rise Value SP Ramp Fall Value Manual Reset Value e Cooling Coefficient e Dead Band e Alarm Value 1 to 3 Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 to 3 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 The currently selected bank s parameters can be read or written by reading or writing the Present Bank parameters Currently selected bank Present bank Set noint t Proportional Band Set noint Proportional Band Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 The following table shows the rela
181. ds for details on the operation commands Variable type Setting range Default Heater Overcurrent 1 or 2 Latch O Disabled I O 1 Enabled Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Installing Current For details refer to Installing Current Transformers CT HB Alarm on Transformers CT page 89 OC Alarm Calculating the Heater For details refer to Calculating the Heater Burnout Detection Current Value Overcurrent on page 90 Detection Value 97 Using the Loop Break Alarm LBA Section 4 6 4 6 Using the Loop Break Alarm LBA 4 6 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA With a loop burnout alarm there is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation SP PV is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation is not reduced by at least the value set in the LBA Band parameter within the specified LBA Detection Time LBA Level LBA Band LBA Level Set point l l l l l Area where LBA LBA LBA is not Detection Detection Detection detected ka Time p4 me Time l l l l Pi lt gt l z 7 E Time LBA OFF LBAON LBAOFF LBA ON 1 2 3 4 S 6 7 e f the control deviation is reduced in the area between 1 and 2 i e the set point is approached and the control deviation is reduce
182. e P for the heating side P e P for the cooling side P for the heating side x Cooling coefficient The cooling P is obtained by multiplying the heating P by the cooling coeffi cient so the cooling output control characteristics are different from the heat ing output control characteristics Output Output 7 Heating P Heating P Cooling P L EN PV aN PV 0 A 0 A Set point Set point Heating P x 0 8 Heating P x 1 5 Variable type Setting range Default D0 90 Cooling Coefficient BANK 0 01 to 99 99 Conditions for use The control method must be set to heating cooling control and 2 PID control Note Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks E Dead Band The dead band is set with the set point as its center Setting a negative value produces an overlap band Output Dead band Output Overlap band Positive dead band width Negative dead band width Heating uU side YN A Set point Set point Cooling side Cooling side PV 68 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Note Note Variable type Setting range DO 90 Dead Band BANK 199 9 to 999 9 EU Conditions for use The control method must be set to heating cooling control The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 kkk _ Refer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks B Manual Reset Value This par
183. e communications port settings The USB Serial Conversion Cable is used to communicate with the COM port of the computer Set the communications port COM port number to be used for the CX Thermo Support Software to the COM port assigned to the Cable 25 Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 2 4 Unit Configuration Examples e The two auxiliary alarm outputs transistor outputs provided on the End Unit can be used e The G3ZA can be connected EJ1L1 TC4 or EJ1L1 EDU EJ1LI TC2 Port A connector USB connection Ji can be made using the E58 CIFQ1 sold separately CX Thermo for setting Minimal Configuration D ZA QA Ol Eje es esee fes rese res s es rs ee esas un SE NEIN INIA Computer IIS INTI QING NO Multiple Units without an e The two auxiliary alarm outputs transistor outputs provided on the End HFU Unit can be used e G3ZA outputs can be used e Distributed placement is possible by using multiple End Units
184. e type Setting range Default E3 A3 Alarm 1 to 3 ON Delay O to 999 Seconds Channel Alarm 1 to 3 OFF Delay O to 999 Seconds Channel Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to 0 Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Operation of Alarm ON and OFF Delays PV for an Upper limit Alarm Alarm settings Alarm hysteresis ON delay set time SS Alarm will not turn ON 85 Setting Alarm Specifications Section 4 4 e The alarm will not turn ON if the time that the alarm is ON is equal to or less than the ON delay set time Likewise the alarm will not turn OFF if the time that the alarm is OFF is equal to or less than the OFF delay set time e f an alarm turns OFF and then back ON during the ON delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns ON Likewise if an alarm turns ON and then back OFF during the OFF delay time the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns OFF 4 4 8 Alarm SP Selection During SP ramping this parameter specifies whether alarm operation is per formed on the ramping SP or the SP that will be reached after ramping Using the Ramping SP Using the SP Temperature Temperature f Alarm output ON em output ON Time Time Note The alarm type is set to 1 Upper and lower limit Variable type Parametername Parametername Setting range Default E3 A3 Alarm 1 to 3 SP
185. ec tive the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON 2 Set the Delay between Outputs parameter to an even number If an odd number is set the next smaller even number will be used 58 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 N Caution e Set the Output Mode Selection parameters to Standard Control for all of the Units channels The Output ON Scheduling function will be disabled if the parameter is not set to Standard Control Even if the Output ON Scheduling Method is set the outputs may be ON at the same time due to the delay in the output device s operation In this case you can prevent the outputs from being ON simultaneously by setting a delay with the Delay between Outputs parameter Refer to the following set ting examples for details on using the delay When using both this function and autotuning always set this function before performing autotuning If this function is set after autotuning control performance may deteriorate e When using this function set the following parameters to their default set tings Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 to 4 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 to 4 and Decimal Point C1 to C4 If these parameters are not set to their defaults the Output ON Scheduling function will not operate properly This function will also be applied to manual outputs outputs during errors and outputs while stopped so these outputs may be lower than their set val ue
186. ed H 00000032 CH1 Bank bitO 50 H 00000033 CH1 Bank bit1 51 H 00000034 CH1 Stop 0 Run 1 52 H 00000035 CH1 Run 0 Stop 1 53 H 00000036 CH1 Auto 0 Manual 1 54 H 00000037 CH1 SP mode Local 0 Remote 1 55 Not used H 00000040 Channel 2 The same as channel 1 64 TC4 H 00000060 Channel 3 The same as channel 1 96 H 00000080 Channel 4 The same as channel 1 128 0031 INN Bus Output 2 Assignment The rest are the same as Bus Output 1 Assignment EFI HFU 0 0032 Bus Output 3 Assignment TC 6 HFU 0 239 Status Lists Appendix Status Lists Use the Status listed in the following tables to check EJ1 status TC4 TC2 CO Status C0 80 0001 Bit position MEL EE Bit description Meaning 9 Bio Noued Bri nouse Bia Noued Bro Nousd Ba Nouse Bts nouse C a pte Note Bro ows ooo Bo Ntued J i oe Or o AAA IO AAA AAA Pr OFF EXC 0 oo oo Bitt6 Notuse ss Bit7 Notused o o ooo Biti8 Notuse EPA CEA A SAA Bit 21 EEPROM RAM EEPROM RAM EEPROM Can confirm whether or not the setting is registered in EEPROM AT Execute Cancel AT is stopped Can confirm AT Execute Cancel progress RUN STOP Run Run stop can be confirmed P Ran Writing enabled Biz8 nous J OOOO O Br29 Notuwed Oooo tso nous AAA Bor jNoued
187. elements 3 Byte Count The number of bytes of data that was read is returned 4 Response Codes Function Error code code H 83 H 01 Function code error A function code that is not supported was specified Variable address error The read start address is not correct the maximum limit HOS Normalena X The service was processed normally H O3 Variable data error e The command is too long e The command is not long enough e The number of elements has exceeded Command Response Example The following command reads the process value of channel 1 Slave address H 01 Read start address H 0200 Read data H 03E8 when the process value is 100 0 C Command 01 03 0200 0001 85B2 CRC 16 Response 01 03 02 03E8 B8FA CRC 16 Detailed Description of Services Section 7 5 7 5 2 Multiple Write to Variable Area This service writes data to the variable area Command Function code __ Slave Write start No of Byte Write data 1 address address elements count H 10 _ 1 1 2 2 1 Number of elements x 2 bytes MEE 2 Response Function code Slave Write start No of address address elements bi H 10 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 1 Write Start Address Refer to Parameter List on page 221 2 No of Elements Specify the number of elements to write The specification range is from H 0001 to H 007F 1 to 127 elements 3 Byte Count Specify the number of bytes of write data Each data element is two bytes So spe
188. ent The rest are the same as from Control Output 1 TC4 79 Assignment to Decimal Point C1 TC2 79 0300 0400 Control Output 3 Assignment TC4 111 TC2 32 Control Output 4 Assignment TC4 143 TC2 64 Note Parameters with the following mark are supported only by version 1 1 Temperature Controllers Refer to Functional Upgrades on page xxii for details on upgraded functionality 23 Y Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 E3 A3 Can be No T A A a seal used changed while 0100 Alarm 1 Type E H 00000000 Alarm function OFF 0 stopped H 00000001 Upper and lower limit alarm 1 H 00000002 Upper limit alarm 2 H 00000003 Lower limit alarm 3 H 00000004 Upper and lower limit range alarm 4 H 00000005 Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence 5 A Upper limit alarm with standby sequence 6 e ARK Lower limit alarm with standby sequence 7 H 00000008 Absolute value upper limit alarm 8 H 00000009 Absolute value lower limit alarm 9 H 0000000A Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence 10 H 0000000B Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence 11 H 0000000C LBA Loop Burnout Alarm 12 0101 Alarm 1 Latch CH1 H 00000000 Disabled T H 00000001 Enabled 1 Alar
189. er to the EJ1 The EJ1 uses different communications specifications from existing products to improve communications operability Parameter Validity The conditions for parameter validity that depended on the model and setting status no longer apply Fixed Values for For example the setting range for the target value is fixed to 1 999 to 9 999 Setting Ranges regardless of the input type In other words the setting ranges under the new specifications will not change based on the input type or related parameters For parameters that set ranges with upper and lower limits the specifications now allow the upper and lower limits to be reversed Refer to 4 1 3 Analog Inputs 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point and MV Limiter on page 75 in Section 4 Basic Units TC4 TC2 before using the EJ1 Automatic Offsetting Accompanying changes outlined under Fixed Values for Setting Ranges of Setting Values above there are no longer any restrictions in operations for the target value limiter or target values for changes in the input type Under the new specifica tions there is also no need to change control output assignments when oper ations such as selecting heating and cooling are performed Refer to 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments Heating Cooling Control on page 68 and 4 3 4 Setting the Set Point in Section 4 Basic Units TC4 TC2 before using the EJ1 6 1 1 Communications Specifications Parameter name Settings e The following co
190. era tions Note G3ZA set values can be read from the Basic Unit connected to the G3ZA The Basic Unit has variables for use with the G3ZA The G3ZA set values can be read and written by reading and writing these variables 161 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 Detailed Description of Services 6 4 1 Read from Variable Area This service reads from a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variable Read start Bit No of elements y DS address pene 2 4 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Read data code for No of elements No of elements x 8 or 4 1 Variable Type and Read Start Address Refer to Parameter List on page 221 2 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to OO 3 No of Elements Read data length No of elements For double word 8 digit variable type 40 max 0028H For word 4 digit variable type Note The following values apply for the DA 9A variable types Read data length For double word 8 digit variable type 25 max 0019H For word 4 digit variable type 50 max 0032H 4 Response Codes Response code Errormame Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 110B Response too long The number of elements exceeds the maximum 1100 Bit position is not 00 7011 Opera
191. eration 139 operation command codes 140 operation command codes for programless communications 142 operation commands CompoWay F 172 operation indicators 2 operation stopped 132 output ON scheduling function 58 output scaling 60 Output Status TC4 TC2 247 Control Output 1 247 Control Output 2 247 Control Output 3 247 Control Output 4 247 output type 21 overlap band 68 P P proportional band 66 parameter list 221 10096 AT Execute Cancel 173 4096 AT Execute Cancel 173 Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis 83 Alarm 1 to 3 Latch 84 Alarm 1 to 3 OFF Delay 85 Alarm 1 to 3 ON Delay 85 Alarm 1 to 3 Open in Alarm 85 Alarm 1 to 3 SP Selection 86 Alarm 1 to Alarm 3 172 Alarm 1 to Alarm 3 Latch Cancel 140 Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 83 Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 to 3 83 Alarm Value 1 to 3 83 All Alarm Latch Cancel 140 172 Alpha 67 AT Calculated Gain 76 AT Cancel 140 172 AT Execute 140 172 AT Hysteresis 76 Auto 140 Auto manual Switch 173 Automatic 172 Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment 152 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment 152 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment 152 Auxiliary Output 4 Assignment 152 Bank 0 Change to Bank 3 Change 140 172 173 Bus Input 1 to 3 Assignment 103 Bus Output 1 to 3 Assignment 103 Bus Output 1 to Bus Output 3 Assignment 153 Cold Junction Compensation Method 32 Control Output 1 Assignment 57 Control Output 2 Assignment 57 Control Output 3 Assignme
192. eren 26 2 4 1 Connection Precautions 0 cece ene 28 11 Installation Section 2 1 2 1 Installation 2 1 1 Dimensions Unit mm TC4 TC2 and HFU Models with Screw Terminals 109
193. erminals for a thermocouple input are shorted e Connect a thermocouple The thermometer was changed or the switch settings e Cycle the power changed while power was ON Easy Method for Checking Thermometers Platinum resistance thermometers 1 Connect a 100 Q resistor between thermometer input terminals A and B and short B and B 2 The EJ1 is working if the measured temperature is 0 0 C or 32 0 F Thermocouples 1 Short the thermometer input terminals 2 The EJ1 is working normally if the temperature in the vicinity of the ter minal block is measured 209 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors Section 8 6 8 6 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors Temperature Is Not Rising Astana as O Counemessue The connection terminal screws are loose and the connec e Tighten the screws securely tion is imperfect The heater power is not turned ON e Turn ON the heater power Heater is burnt out or deteriorated Replace with a better quality heater The heater s heating capacity is insufficient e Replace with a heater with a bigger heating capacity e f more than one heater is used check for burnt out heaters and replace if necessary An overheating protection device is operating e Set the set value for the overheating protection device to higher than the EJ1 set value Setting The normal and reverse operation settings are incor
194. es can be read and written by reading and writing that variable area Refer to Parameter List on page 221 for details on the vari able area for the G3ZA Refer to the G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller User s Manual Cat No Z200 for details on the corresponding functions and settings m Example In this example G3ZA settings are changed 105 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 Sending MVs to the G3ZA G3ZA Models with 4 Unit No 1 Host device Send the following command from the host device to TC4 when setting the Channel 2 Heater Burnout Detection Value to 10 A in the G3ZA with unit number 1 STX 0100001029A0219000001000A ETX BCC Unit No O Unit No 1 The G3ZA s unit number and model determine which MVs are sent from the EJ1 to the G3ZA The EJ1 uses the G3ZA s unit number to determine whether to send heating Channels outputs or cooling outputs e G3ZA Units with unit numbers O to 7 e G3ZA Units with unit numbers 8 to 15 TC4 G3ZA TC4 G3ZA CH1 Control Output Heating Channel 1 MV CH1 Control Output Cooling CH3 Control Output Heating Channel 1 MV Channel 3 MV CH3 Control Output Cooling Channel 2 MV Channel 3 MV CH2 Control Output Heating CH4 Control Output Heating Note G3ZA Models with 8 Channels Note MVs Output from the G3ZA 106 Channel 2 MV CH2 Control Output Cooling Channel 4 MV CH
195. etting method Untnumber 001063 o SWuswa Port B communica 0 CompoWay F 0 CompoWay F Communications tions protocol 1 Modbus Port B communica 3 9 6 3 9 6 kbps Communications tions baud rate 4 19 2 5 38 4 6 57 6 7 115 2 kbps 178 Communications Settings Section 7 1 Parameter name Setting range Default Setting method Port B communica 0 None 1 Even bit Communications tions parity 1 Even 2 Odd bit Port B send data O to 99 ms 5 ms Communications wait time Note 1 Always set the port B communications protocol to Modbus 1 2 The port B communications data length and port B communications stop bits settings do not need to be changed 7 1 2 Unit Number Setting The unit number is set first The setting is made on SW1 and SW on the front of the EJ1 For information on the setting method refer to 1 1 4 Using Setting Switches 7 1 3 Other Communications Settings The communications protocol communications band rate communications data length communications parity and send data wait time are set using the CX Thermo Support Software When the above settings are changed the changes will not be enabled until the EJ1 is reset or the power is cycled 7 1 4 Send Data Wait Time The send data wait time setting is used to adjust the time the host computer takes to switch from sending to receiving Specifically the send data wait time for the EJ1 is the time from afte
196. f the HFU is set to 1 set the commu nications unit number of the Basic Unit to O 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 i e any num ber other than 1 148 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 e RS 422 EJ1 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC HFU TC EDU r3 Unit Unit No 7 No O Note Set the unit number of the Basic Unit to any number that was not set for the HFU 149 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 MELSEC Q QnA QnAS series PLC EJ1N HFUL NFL2 RS 422 6 agoa Shield Y SDA IN A2 SDB 83 a mrs 64 EJ1N HFUCI NFL2 23737 S AS D B6 a D AAT RDB a SOB a AS O B RS 422 amp 3 de m B5 AS B6 RDB AD AB t SDB 4 ACIE 88 RS 422 L 69 09 spac A9 2 Make the PLC settings Hefer to Make the PLC settings on page 117 3 Make the EJ1 settings Make the following setting in all HFUs that are connected Variable type Setting Monitor values FO BO Port C Send Wait Time Programless Communications Protocol 5 MC protocol format 5 Programless Communications Maximum Set the highest unit num Unit Number See note ber of the HFUs that are connected Note f three HFUs are connected set the maximum unit number to 2 150 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 Refer to 5 1 3 Detailed Settings for information on data linked with the PLC Be sure that the areas of PLC memory used by the different HFUs do not overlap INCORRECT CORRECT PLC Memo
197. fault Default Default Default Default Programless Communications Upload Data Area See note 1 Programless Communications Download Data Area See note 1 Programless Communications Upload Start Address See note 1 Programless Communications Download Start Address See note 1 1000 Upload settings Programless Upload Settings 4 Programless Upload Settings 5 Unit No 1 CH1 Process Value Unit No 1 Common Device A Status Unit No 1 CH2 Process Value Unit No 1 CH3 Process Value Unit No 1 CH4 Process Value Unit No 2 Common Device A Status Unit No 2 CH1 Process Value Unit No 2 CH2 Process Value Unit No 2 CH3 Process Value Unit No 2 CH4 Process Value Unit No 3 Common Device A Status Unit No 3 CH1 Process Value Unit No 3 CH2 Process Value Unit No 3 CH3 Process Value Unit No 3 CH4 Process Value Unit No 0 Common End Code Programless Upload Settings 6 Programless Upload Settings 7 Programless Upload Settings 8 Programless Upload Settings 9 Programless Upload Settings 10 Programless Upload Settings 11 Programless Upload Settings 12 Programless Upload Settings 13 Programless Upload Settings 14 Programless Upload Settings 15 Programless Upload Settings 16 Programless Upload Settings 17 Programless Upload Settings 18 Programless Upload Settings 19 Download settings Programless Download Settings 4 Unit No 1 CH1 Set Point Unit No 1 C
198. for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions vii Safety Precautions E Definition of Precautionary Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions The following notation is used Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not AMA lO LN avoided is likely to result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage E Symbols General Caution Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Caution Electrical Shock Caution Indicates possibility of electric shock under specific conditions sie General Prohibition Prohibition da um Indicates non specific general prohibitions General Caut
199. goes ON The latch can be released to turn OFF the alarm by executing an operation command Latch Cancel or Software Reset Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Com mands for details on the operation commands Variable type Setting range Default E3 A3 Alarm 1 to 3 Latch Channel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to O Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 84 Setting Alarm Specifications Section 4 4 4 4 6 Closed in Alarm or Open in Alarm When Close in Alarm is set the alarm output function s status will be output as is When Open in Alarm is set the alarm output function s status will be reversed before being output Ld Alarm Output Function Alarm Output Close in Alarm Open in Alarm The alarm output will be OFF open when the power is interrupted and for about 3 seconds after the power is turned ON regardless of the Close in Alarm Open in Alarm setting Variable type Setting range Defauit Alarm 1 to 3 Open in Alarm 0 Closed Channel 1 Open Conditions for use An alarm must be assigned to the control output Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 4 4 7 Alarm Delay Delays can be set for the alarm outputs ON and OFF delays can be set for each alarm and also reflected in the com munications status The alarm s ON delay will also operate when the power is turned ON or a software reset is performed Variabl
200. gramless Communications Section 5 1 e f non existent settings are set programless uploading and downloading will not operate correctly The communications speed may also be affected so always use valid settings B Error Status The Error Status is used for detection of Basic Unit internal communications errors Leftmost bit Unit No Rightmost bit Error Status 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 The bit corresponding to the unit number will turn ON if an error occurred in communications during programless downloading or programless uploading The status ON OFF conditions are listed in the following table At least one error occurred Normal communications occurred 22 times in a row 40 times for ver sion MARI m Examples Bit 15 Turns ON This indicates that a communications error has occurred for Unit No 15 Communications For the EJ1 to communicate with the PLC the Programless Communications Protocols and Protocol must be set and the area in PLC memory that will be allocated to Memory Allocation parameters for the Programless Upload Download Settings must be set e The communications protocol is set under Programless Communications Protocol e Select the type of memory area under Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area and set the start address for the memory allocation in the Programless Communications Upload Download Start Address E Programless Communications Protocol Varia
201. hange set tings When the above settings are changed the changes will not be enabled until the EJ1 is reset or the power is cycled 6 1 4 Send Data Wait Time The send data wait time setting is used to adjust the time the host computer takes to switch from sending to receiving Specifically the send data wait time for the EJ1 is the time from after a response has been created after data has been received until the EJ1 switches to sending Host device Send status Send S 4 Receive Receive Send Est Receive status Send status Response created Send data wait time The setting of the Send Wait Time parameter can be shortened to reduce the communications time at the host device as long as there are no problems 157 Frame Configuration Section 6 2 6 2 Frame Configuration The communications protocol is CompoWay F Commands from the host computer and responses from the EJ1 are con tained in data blocks called frames The structures of the command and response frames are described below In the following explanations hexadecimal values are expressed by adding the suffix H after the number e g 02H All other alphanumeric values in the explanations indicate ASCII characters Note CompoWay F CompoWay F is OMRON s standard communications format for general serial communications It uses commands compliant with the well established FINS used exten sively with OMRON Programmable Controllers together with a co
202. he digital input filter The following diagram shows the response of the digital filter to a step wise input of amplitude A L PV before passing through filter Time constant 0 63 A Input digital filter Variable type Setting range Default D5 95 Input Digital Filter Channel 0 0 to 999 9 Seconds loo Conditions for use No special conditions PV after passing through filter Time Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 4 2 Setting Output Specifications 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments The parameters shown in the following diagram can be assigned to each out put by setting the control output assignments The same parameter can be assigned to different outputs OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 e OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4 can be set in the same way Settable e Channels 3 and 4 are supported only by the TC4 parameters Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 o o All channels Channel 1 p ae Disabled Alarm 1 to 3 P Temperature Controller Error All Alarm OR EN All Alarm OR All Alarm AND pen All Alarm AND Input Error LE Alarm Alarm 1 to 3 OR RSP Input Error umm am Alarm 1 to 3 AND HB Heater Burnout Alarm larm pam WEN EN Input Error OR HS Heater Short Alarm RSP Input Error OR OC Heater Overcurrent Alarm HS Heater Short Alarm OR Internal SP OC Heater Overcurrent A
203. hen the control object or sensor has a long dead time e When hunting occurs in normal mode for any reason e Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when autotuning is executed in normal mode it is less likely to occur when autotuning is executed in HT mode Temperature l Temperature mE Much hunting occurs Hunting is reduced Set value Set value Time A Time Start of control Start of control e When the temperature PV falls short of the set point for the PID con stants when using autotuning in normal mode executing autotuning in RT mode tends to improve performance Temperature Temperature Set value Set value A Time Time Start of control Start of control e When the manipulated variable MV is saturated the amount of over shooting may be somewhat higher in comparison to PID control based on autotuning in normal mode Switching to and from RT Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 HT Channel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control and the input type must be a temperature input Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 78 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 4 3 9 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function adjusts the control wave form when an external disturbance impacts the system e When using this function set the D
204. ifications n e enana nanana 82 4 5 Detecting Current Errors ecuestre Ta ERES ce die E uerus e ea 87 4 6 Using the Loop Break Alarm LBA ooo oooooooooooor es 98 4 7 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 lseeeeeeeee RR eee ee ene 100 SECTION 5 Advanced Unit HFU Functions 109 5 1 Prosramless Communications x rac poe or es ee dada ER eR EORR SE e ie a 110 5 2 Connecting More Than One HFU WAM eee 145 5 3 Other HFU Functions 64 666 bcd deca su eid bude rra 152 SECTION 6 CompoWay F Communications 155 6 1 Communications Settings eee eee eee eee 156 6 2 Frame Conncurauon c ao dome eea dead ra hd eed eee RE 480 eed deeb e dented 158 63 TUNG lesvianas dada 160 6 4 Detailed Description of ServiCeS o o oo oooooooroo ee 162 X X XX TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 7 Modbus Communications WEEK 177 7 1 Communications Settings senora ad de P REALE eds RR a de 178 Gal CAMS cesen ta a pee a QT 180 Js JBUHCUORC OUS ia ua dad pese Baca dede MR TCR oo a 182 Jd A o A 183 1 5 Detailed Description Of Services a2 84 4 edt avhdhadhga arab 06468 184 SECTION 8 Errors and Error Processing 191 5 1 Things to Check PRSE ecos pone paa eae 192 8 2 Determining Errors from Indicators 20 eee eens 193 8 3 Determining the Error from the Status 0 0 0 0 cc cee 195 8 4 Determi
205. iguration error 7013 Operation error The command cannot be executed because 7013 the operation command cannot be received Execute retries until the 7013 response code is reset 174 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 Response code 7014 Operation error The command cannot be executed because 7014 EEPROM is currently being written Execute retries until the 7014 response code is reset 7015 Operation error The command cannot be executed during 7015 reset including startup 7016 Operation error The command cannot be executed during 7016 error latch status 7020 Operation error The command cannot be executed in the cur 7020 rent control mode 7021 Operation error The command cannot be executed because 7021 the control switching conditions have not been established 7030 Operation error The command cannot be executed in the cur 7030 rent output mode 7041 Operation error The command cannot be executed in manual 7041 operation mode 7042 Operation error The command cannot be executed in tuning 7042 mode 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 175 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 176 SECTION 7 Modbus Communications This section describes how to use Modbus communications based on communications commands 7 1 Communications Settings o oooooooorrrrrr ees 178 7 1 1 Communications Specifications o ooooooooooooooooooooo 178 TeleZ Unit Num
206. ing Unit configuration figuration Registration of registration or composite read registration and not multiple reads all data was registered Ba Notused Bts Nouse J Bre nousa S B7 Nouse ooo Bit 9 EEPROM RAM RAM z Can confirm whether or not the setting is registered EEPROM EEPROM in EEPROM Brit Notus Bit 12 Configuration Regis Not regis Registered Configuration registration status can be confirmed tered tered Bit 16 247 Status Lists Appendix Channel Status C4 84 0101 CH1 0201 CH2 0301 CH3 0401 CH4 Bit position A Bit description Meaning Bit O RUN STOP Run Stop can be confirmed Bit 1 Auto Manual Auto Manual can be confirmed Bit 2 AT Execute Cancel AT is AT Can confirm AT Execute Cancel stopped execution in progress Bit 3 SP mode can be confirmed Bts Nous O LLL A A Noerror Error Channel Alarm Status C4 84 0102 CH1 0202 CH2 0302 CH3 0402 CH4 Bit position Bit description Bit O OFF An alarm 1 error has occurred Bs Noted S pte Noted S S Bto noted Brio Noted O S Bm NRwed J o S Bit 12 Set Point Limiter Out of No error Error The set point is outside the set point limiter range Range Bit 13 Set Value Limiter No error Error The upper and lower set point limits are reversed Reverse Operation Bit 14 MV Limiter Reverse No error Error The upper and lower MV limits are reversed Operation Bit 15 Scaling Rever
207. int shift at points above and below the set point temperature An example shift is shown in the following diagram Controller readout A Controller readout after shifting e g 550 C Aer Saming Input Shift 2 Controller readout before shifting e g 500 C H mm Before shifting Input value 2 for Input Correction Input value 1 for Input Correction Controller readout before shifting e g 40 C Controller readout after shifting e g 25 C uid Control target temperature B Room temperature Temperature near set point e g 25 C e g 550 C E Two point Shift Example In this example the input type is set to K 5 200 C to 1 300 C Check the temperature of the control target When room temperature B 25 C the Controller readout A 40 C When the temperature near the set point B 550 C the Controller readout A 500 C In this case the input shift parameters are calculated as follows Input Value 1 for Input Correction Controller readout A 40 C Input Shift 1 Object temperature B Controller readout A 25 C 40 C 15 00 C 55 Setting Input Specifications 4 1 5 Input Filter 56 Section 4 1 Input Value 2 for Input Correction Controller readout A 500 C Input Shift 2 Object temperature B Controller readout A 550 C 500 C 50 00 C Sets the time constant of t
208. ion Indicates non specific general cautions warnings and dangers Mandatory Caution viii E Safety Precautions N CAUTION Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric shock Use a power supply that complies with the reinforced insulation specified in IEC 60664 for the EJ1 external power supply or the power supply connected to the EJ1 If non compliant power supplies are used electric shock may occasionally result in minor injury Do not allow pieces of metal wire clippings or fine metallic shav ings or filings from installation to enter the product Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock fire or malfunction Do not use the product where subject to flammable or explosive gas Otherwise minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur Never disassemble modify or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts Minor electric shock fire or malfunction may occasionally occur Tighten the terminal screws to between 0 40 and 0 56 N m Loose screws may occasionally result in fire Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled If they are not suitable unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents A malfunction in the product may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs resulting in property damage To main
209. ion B 80 Output Mode Selection 67 Output ON Scheduling Method 58 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 to 4 60 Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 to 4 60 Parameter Initialization 172 174 PID OnOff 64 Port B communications baud rate 157 178 Port B communications data length 157 Port B communications parity 157 179 Port B communications protocol 157 178 Port B communications stop bits 157 Port B send data wait time 157 179 Port C Communications Baud Rate 127 Port C Communications Data Length 127 Port C Communications Parity 127 Port C Communications Stop Bits 127 Port C Send Wait Time 117 127 150 Programless Communications Protocol 117 147 150 Programless Communications Receive Wait Time 128 Proportional Band 65 Proportional Band x 10 Compensation 66 Register Unit Configuration 140 172 174 Remote SP Change 142 172 174 187 239 260 Index Remote SP Enable 72 Remote SP Monitor 72 Reset Error 172 174 RSP Change 172 174 Run 140 172 RUN STOP 173 Save RAM Data 140 172 174 Save RAM Data 2 172 174 Scaling Lower Limit 53 Scaling Upper Limit 53 Set Point 69 Software Reset 140 172 173 SP Lower Limit 69 SP Ramp Fall Value 71 SP Ramp Rise Value 71 SP Ramp Time Unit 71 SP Upper Limit 69 Stop 140 172 Temperature unit 52 Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation 76 Unit number 157 178 Write Mode 172 173 Write mode 140 parameters that can be allocated for pr
210. ion H 00000000 Zero cross SSR for single phase NUM heater optimum cycle control 0 H 00000001 Non zero cross SSR for single phase heater soft start optimum cycle control 1 H 00000002 Zero cross SSR for three phase heater three phase optimum cycle control 2 0186 G3ZA1 Current Monitor Display Selec H 00000000 0 to 50 A 0 NUM tion H 00000001 0 to 150 A 1 H 00000002 0 to 100 2 0187 EM G3ZA1 Communications Hysteresis grz 00000000 to H 0000012C 0 0 to 30 0 el 0188 G3ZA1 Communications Timeout Time ETE H 00000000 Disabled NUM 2 See note 1 H 00000001 to H 00000E10 1 to 3600 0189 E G3ZA1 CT1 Assignment See note 1 H 00000000 Disabled 0 H 00000001 ch1 1 018A EE G3ZA1 CT2 Assignment See note 1 m os A o C 018B E G3ZA1 CT3 Assignment See note 1 H 00000004 ch4 4 018C p G3ZA1 CT4 Assignment See note 1 01CO EE G3ZA1 CH1 Soft Increase Time grz 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 a CoC or 01C1 E G3ZA1 CH2 Soft Increase Time ma 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 purge cM e 1 01C2 ME G3ZA1 CH3 Soft Increase Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 moo quee m 01C3 E G3ZA1 CH4 Soft Increase Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 Be CE e cm 01C4 S G3ZA1 CH5 Soft Increase Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 ESAS ELLA 01C5 B G3ZA1 CH6 Soft Increase Time H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 0 to 99 9 poop mde dl 01C6 p G3ZA1 CH7 Soft Incre
211. ions error will occur after the following times have expired Programless Maximum time until programless communications communications error protocol NT Link 1 N 30 s See note MC Protocol Format 5 Programless Communications Receive Wait Times x 3 6 AnA AnU aa Com for the default setting mon Commands 144 Connecting More Than One HFU Section 5 2 Note Ifa programless communications error occurs because the PLC power supply turns OFF when using the NT Link 1 N protocol the error can be cleared by turn ON the PLC power supply 5 2 Connecting More Than One HFU 5 2 1 SYSMAC CS CJ series PLCs Up to eight Advanced Units HFU can be connected to one communications port on a Serial Communications Unit or Serial Communications Board Use the following models when connecting more than one HFU Serial Communications Units CJ1W SCU31 V1 Port 1 of CJ1W SCUA1 V1 CS1W SCU31 V1 Serial Communications Board Port 2 of CS1W SCB41 V1 EJ1N HFU EJ1N HFUA NFLK EJ1N HFUB NFLK 1 2 3 1 Connect the EJ1 and PLC Always set the communications unit numbers of the HFU in order from O through 7 and set the communications unit numbers of the Basic Units connected to each HFU to a different communications unit number than the HFU m Example If the communications unit number of the HFU is set to 1 set the commu nications unit number of the Basic Unit to O 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 i e any num ber other than 1 145
212. ions partner 206 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 Programless No Programless Communications between the PLC and the EJ1 Communications Staus i O Possible cause Countermeasure No communications between There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the PLC and the EJ1 the EJ1 supply terminal Refer to the respective manuals and The Serial Communications Board SCB Unit SCU wir wire the connection correctly ing is incorrect See Related Manuals on page xiv ES The port C communications Turn ON pin 8 on the HFU settings are setto RS 485 switch 2 SW2 to set to RS 232C The Serial Communications Connect the SCU RS 232C port to Board SCB Unit SCU RS the EJ1 RS 232C port 485 port is connected to the EJ1 RS 232C port The EJ1 programless commu nications parameters are incorrect Connection SCB SCU RS 232C EJ1 Refer to 5 1 Programless Communi cations in SECTION 5 Advanced Unit HFU Functions and check the set tings The Serial Communications Same as above Board SCB Unit SCU com munications settings are incorrect Connection port Connection port EJ1 Port C HFU RS 232C No communications between There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power the PLC and the EJ1 the EJ1 supply terminal The Serial Communications Refer to the respe
213. ions wait time except when the programless communications protocol is NT Link 1 N Programless Upload Reduce the volume of communications data by reducing the Download Settings number of set values This may reduce the communications time Review these settings based on system requirements Note The above measures may result in an inability to communicate lt is recom mended that a record is kept of the set values when communications are suc cessful to ensure recovery is possible 139 Programless Communications Section 5 1 5 1 5 Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications 140 e Write mode e Auto e All Alarm Latch Cancel The following parameters are executed using operation commands e Software Reset e Run e Stop e Manual e AT Execute e AT Cancel e Bank 0 Change to Alarm 1 to Alarm 3 Bank 3 Change Latch Cancel e Save RAM Data Register Unit Con figuration Command codes for programless communications operation commands differ from command codes in CompoWay F communications because the data length is limited to 16 bits Operation command codes for programless communications can be checked using the Programless Communications Utility for EJ1 in the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software BP og ardens E orrera ations Ued y hor IL The Programless Communications Utility for EJ1 can be started under Start Program OMRON CX one CX Thermo Programless Communica tions Utility for EJ1
214. ires The resistance of the 3 conductors between the thermome Use conductors with the same resistance for all three ter ter and the EJ1 terminals is different minals A B and B terminals Installation Affected by noise emitted by devices near the EJ1 Move the EJ1 away from devices emitting noise e Connect a surge suppressor or noise filter to devices emit ting noise The thermometer lead is too close to the power line and is e Separate the thermometer lead from the power line receiving induction noise from the power line e Run the thermometer lead through a different pipe or duct from the power line e Do not wire the thermometer lead and the power line in parallel e Wire a shorter thermometer lead Use a shield on the thermometer lead The thermal response is slow because the installation posi Install the thermometer with the end of the protective tube tion of the thermometer is too far from the control point closer to the control point The ambient temperature of the EJ1 exceeds the rating Keep the ambient temperature between the rating range of 10 to 55 C A wireless device is used in the vicinity of the EJ1 e Shield the EJ1 radiated from peripheral devices heat Settings The input type settings are incorrect The temperature unit settings are incorrect The measured temperature seems incorrect due to the input Set the input compensation to 0 0 compensation setting Procedure The input t
215. is turned ON Operation Operation Continue Manipulated e For Auto mode before power OFF 0 0 or 100 0 variable MV depends on RUN STOP status When set to RUN operation starts from the initial value When set to STOP operation starts from the MV at Stop parameter setting e For Manual mode before power OFF The manipulated variable from before power was inter rupted is maintained RUN STOP Stop Same as 2 PID control Auto Manual Retains the status that existed before power went OFF Manipulated e For Auto mode before power OFF 0 0 variable Operation starts from the MV at Stop parameter setting e For Manual mode before power OFF The manipulated variable from before power was inter rupted is maintained Manual mode RUN STOP Retains the status that existed before power went OFF Auto Manual Manipulated e For Auto mode before power OFF variable Operation starts from the MV at Stop parameter setting e For Manual mode before power OFF The manipulated variable from before power was inter rupted is maintained 63 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 4 3 2 Selecting the Control Method Note ON OFF Control Note 64 The control method can be set to either 2 PID control or ON OFF control Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 PID OnOff Channel 0 2 PID control 1 ON OFF control Conditions for use No special conditions This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped
216. ise Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to 0 EU min BANK ra 0105 02C5 Present Bank SP Ramp Fall Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to O EU min Not used 0107 02C7 Present Bank Manual Reset Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 BANK 0108 02C8 Present Bank Cooling Coefficient CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 to 99 99 11 00 BANK 0109 02C9 Present Bank Dead Band CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note EET BANK mm 2 Not used 010D 02CD Present Bank Alarm Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999109999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 010E O2CE Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 EU BANK ll CH1 010F 02CF Present Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 m mi BANK Em CH1 0110 02D0 Present Bank Alarm Value 2 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK 0111 02D1 Present Bank Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 Er ER BANK em CH1 0112 02D2 Present Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 2 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 E BANK m CH1 02D3 Present Bank Alarm Value 3 CH1 H
217. isturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function parameter to 1 Enabled e The disturbance response waveform can be adjusted with the Distur bance Gain and Disturbance Time Constant parameters Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 See note 1 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment 0 Disabled Function Common 1 Enabled D5 95 Disturbance Gain Channel Disturbance Time Constant 0 01 to 99 99 s 1 00 Channel Disturbance Rectification Band 0 0 to 999 9 EU Channel See note 2 Disturbance Judgment Width 199 9 to 999 9 EU Channel See note 2 Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 B Disturbance Gain e Overshooting due to a disturbance can be suppressed more by increasing the Disturbance Gain e Overshooting due to a disturbance can be increased by decreasing the Disturbance Gain e f the Disturbance Gain is set to 0 the Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function will not operate Disturbance Gain 1 Temperature os X Disturbance Gain 0 5 4 1 N Disturbance Gain 0 Disturbance Gain 0 5 Disturbance Gain 1 0 Time B Disturbance Time Constant The recovery time from the disturbance can be made l
218. isturbance Time Constam CH H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 to 09 5 roo fa fo 8 o2F3 Disturbance Rectification Band CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 010 969 8 Ses mate 2 oo EU fo je 14 ozr4 Disturbance Judgment Width CH1 H FFFFF8St to H 0000270F 199 9 t0 099 9 See note 2 00 EU n fe Not used 0200 04E0 Input Digital Filter CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 ES eae 0300 Input Digital Filter CH3 TOA ESA A 0400 Input Digital Filter CH4 ITC4 lil Note 1 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range De Ganbe 0 00 0300 Heater Burnout 1 Detection H O000000019H 0000038 00101000 09 A 69 Sine o1o1 0301 HSAami F 0000000010 Fr o00003E8 0010 1000 romo A wo Not used 0200 0500 Heater Burnout 2 Detection The rest are the same as from Heater Burnout Detection 1 to Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 operation 0102 0302 Heater Overcurrent 1 Detection H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 A IO TC2 227 Parameter List Appendix Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 7 Ca
219. je j 0105 02E5 MV at PV Error CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 ch Heating and Cooling Control H FFFFFBE6 to H 0000041A 105 0 to 105 0 0106 02E6 MV at Stop CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 Heating and Cooling Control H FFFFFBE6 to H 0000041A 105 0 to 105 0 Not used 0109 02E9 MV Upper Limit CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 Heating and Cooling Control H 00000000 to H 0000041A 0 0 to 105 0 010A 02EA MV Lower Limit CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 Heating and Cooling Control H FFFFFBE6 to H 00000000 105 0 to 0 0 010B O2EB Hysteresis Heating CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 1 0 JEU nh e 010C 02EC Hysteresis Cooling CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note 2 1 0 JEU ch Je j 010D O2ED Alpha CH1 H 00000000 to H 00000064 0 00 to 1 00 0 65 ch je j 010E 02EE Manual MV CH1 Standard Control H FFFFFFCE to H 0000041A 5 0 to 105 0 Heating and Cooling Control H FFFFFBE6 to H 0000041A 105 0 to 105 0 oror 02EF SPUpperLimi CHi H FFFFF881 to H 0000270F 1998 to 9980 Ses nate1 999 EU on Je H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 1999 EU ch je j fort 02F1 Disturbance Gain OHI HFEFERFSC 1o H 00000064 100101007 Joss o Je forte o2r2 D
220. ke sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact If the voltage is applied gradually the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur 10 Make sure that the product has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display 11 The switch or circuit breaker must be within easy reach of the operator and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this unit 12 Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with Use standard grade alcohol 13 Design the system e g the control panel allowing leeway for the delay required before product outputs are valid after turning ON power to the product 14 Never touch the electronic components connectors or patterns on product boards with your bare hands Always hold the product by the case Inappropriately handling the product may occasionally damage internal components due to static electricity 15 Use a switch relay or other device with contacts to turn OFF the power supply quickly Gradually lowering the voltage of the power supply may result in incorrect outputs or memory errors 16 Do not touch the electronic components with your hands or subject them to shock when removing the terminal block 17 Connect only the specified number of products in only a specified configuration 18 Mount the product to a DIN Rail mounte
221. l W445 Note The Serial Communications Board SCB Unit SCU must be unit version 1 2 or later Refer to Unit Versions of CS CJ series Serial Communica tions Boards Units in the Serial Communications Board Unit Operation Manual W336 for information on checking unit versions 205 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Status The Smart Active Part SAP does not communicate with the EJ1 Connection NS series PLC CS CJ SCB SCU RS 485 EJ1 or NS series PLC CS CJ SCB SCU CJ1W CIF1 1 RS 422A Converter RS 485 EJ1 Connection port Connection port Pr e PLO Scu EJ1 Port B EDU Note Section 8 4 Countermeasure Possible cause There is no power supply to the Supply power from the EDU power EJ1 supply terminal T he SAP is not compatible with Use an SAP for the EJ1 the EJ1 The SAP is not for serial con Use an SAP for serial Programmable nection Terminal connection The Serial Communications Set the Serial Communications Board SCB Unit SCU and Board s or Unit s baud rate the same the EJ1 communications set as the port B baud rate tings do not match Hint The EJ1 baud rate is set under the Port B Communications Baud Rate parameter e The available baud rate settings are 9 6 kbps default 19 2 kbps 38 4 kbps 57 6 kbps and 115 2 kbps See no
222. l area of the wiring material We recommend the following crimp terminals Weidmuller H sleeve Series Connect the power supply to EDU terminals 8 and 9 as shown below 244DC 8 ___ input power supply EDU e f reinforced insulation is required connect the input and output terminals to a device without any exposed current carrying parts or to a device with standard insulation suitable for the maximum operating voltage of the power supply I O section e Conforming to Safety Standards The power supply terminals must be supplied from a SELV limited current source A SELV separated extra low voltage source is a power supply having double or reinforced insulation between the primary and the sec ondary circuits and having an output voltage of 30 V r m s max and 42 4 V peak max or 60 VDC max Recommended power supply S8VM Series or S8VS Series both manu factured by OMRON Note Select a power supply that suits the operating environment e To comply with the standards for noise terminal voltage for class A in EN 61326 install a noise filter Densei Lambda MXB 1206 33 or the equiva lent to the DC line as close as possible to the EJ1 19 Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 Inputs Connect inputs according to the input type as shown below TC4 TC4 TC4 SAS i ch2 ch4 SAA
223. l remain LSP1 e f the SP Ramp function was enabled when operation switched from the local SP to the remote SP the SP ramp function will operate 73 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 See note SP Tracking Channel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Conditions for use The Remote SP function must be enabled Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped SP tracking can be used for channel 1 or channel 2 for the TC4 but only for channel 1 for the TC2 4 3 7 Setting the Manipulated Variable MV E Manual MV If control is set to manual mode the standard control function will stop and the MV set in the Manual MV parameter can be output Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default D5 95 Manual MV Channel 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling control Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control in manual mode Actual MV Actual MV 105 0 100 096 Standard 1000 k control or Manual MV 0 0 heating sabi Cooling Manual MV 100 096 output 105 0 100 0 105 0 Use an event input or operation command to switch between auto mode standard control and manual mode When using an event input to switch modes set the Event Input Assignment parameter to Auto 0 Manual 1 After the event input is set it will operate as fo
224. larm OR Local SP Remote SP Control Output Heating Control Output Cooling Transfer Output Heating Transfer Output Cooling NE L d HB Heater Burnout Alarm OR Process Value B angi anio Note 1 e Temperature Controller Error The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when an bit be tween bit O and bit 13 in the Device A Status is ON It can be used to out put EJ1 error status Refer to Status Lists on page 240 for details on Device A Status 2 If any parameters other than those marked with 1 and 2 are assigned to outputs for Controllers with linear outputs 100 will be output for ON and 0 will be outputs for OFF This will also apply to parameters marked with 2 if the control method is set to ON OFF control Variable type Parameter name Setting range Default E1 A1 Control Output 1 Assignment I O 0 to 144 Control Output 2 Assignment I O 0 to 144 Control Output 3 Assignment I O O to 144 Control Output 4 Assignment I O O to 144 Conditions for use No special conditions Note These parameters can be set only when operation is stopped Refer to Parameter List on page 221 for details on the settings 57 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 4 2 2 Control Output Method The time proportional output method is used for the control output The MV determines the percentage of time that the output is ON during each control period 100 80
225. llows Event input OFF Auto Mods Manual Mods Note Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands for details on using an operation com mand to switch the mode Check the Channel Status parameter variable type C4 84 to confirm whether the Controller is in auto mode or manual mode Operation When The following diagram shows the operation when the mode is switched Switching between Auto between auto mode and manual mode and Manual Modes 2d Inherits the MV that existed before the mode change Time MV Power Power MV M changes OFF ON changes anda Power Auto interrupted 74 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 E MV at Stop This parameter sets the MV when control is stopped For heating cooling control the MV at Stop parameter applies to the cooling side if the MV is negative and to the heating side if the MV is positive The default is 0 0 so an MV will not be output for either standard or heating cooling control with the default setting Variable type Setting range Default D5 95 MV at Stop Channel 5 0 to 105 0 for standard control 105 0 to 105 0 for heating cooling control Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control The order of priority is as follows Manual MV gt MV at Stop gt MV at PV Error E MV at PV Error This parameter sets the MV when an input error or remote SP input error occurs Variable type Setting range Default D5 95 MV at PV Error 5
226. load Area Download Area deny Pee polige Read Request Bits Setting Change Setting Change 0000 0000 E 4 n 4 5 The Operation Command Request Bits are cleared by the PLC Communications m Status 6 The EJ1 clears the Operation Command Response Bits Programless Communications Section 5 1 e Multi Operation Commands Accepts operation commands each time the operation command code changes 2 The Operation Command Response Bits are set by the PLC PLC Upload Area Download Area ges Memory ima Head Response 7 Bits Setting Change ottina Changs Response Bits E di Request Bits 0002 n2 0002 I EJ1 Read Request Bits ki li Communications iul Status 1 The EJ1 sets the Operation Command Request Bits e Stop Operation Operation is stopped after a series of operations has been completed 3 The EJ1 repeatedly reads the operation command code PLC Upload Area Download Area diim nesponse Read Request Bits Setting Change Setting Change m 2 0000 0000 E Communications I I 2 The EJ1 clears the Operation Command Response Bits 1 The Operation Command Request Bits are cleared by the PLC Reducing Try the following measures if communications are slow Communications time Communications may be reduced depending on the conditions Time Checkpoint MeaWng Port C Send Wait Time Reduce the setting to reduce the communicat
227. lolojololololo o MS o IA IA o IA O IS o EM O IS o DID o lololololol l l lolololololo l olololololo olololololo OIOIOIOI OI OIOI OIOIOIO l spas Af 2 a e Af A af a a a fa a a af da a fa a da a a da a a a o ol OIO IO O O O O O O O O 2 2 A 2 AU da da da df da dd do do fdo do od do dad da fo dd da dl do ld do od lod lod lod O 2 All channels specified Related 2 informa tion O lt a Ol l a Ol l o o a Ol l 23 l O a Oj 143 Programless Communications Section 5 1 5 1 6 Programless Communications Errors Possible Causes of e A value outside the setting range was written Parameter Access e A non existent Unit was accessed Problems e An attempt was made to change a setting for which changes are prohib ited Example An attempt was made to change the SP during autotuning In the above cases the Response Bits will be set to the following error values Bits Obenton Error value Head Response Bits Setting Change Response Bits Operation Command Response Bits If an error value is set for Response Bits check the following items e Setting range e Unit number e Whether
228. m 1 Hysteresis CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 999 9 See note CA CN CE CA 0103 prem 1 Open in Alarm CH1 H 00000000 Close in alarm H 00000001 Open in alarm 1 0104 Alarm 1 ON Delay CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 to 999 0105 Alarm1 OFF Delay CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E7 0 to 999 0106 Alarm 1 SP Selection CH1 H 00000000 Ramp SP 0 H 00000001 Target SP 1 0107 EM Alarm 2 Type CH1 The rest are the same as Alarm 1 BRANCH A CON A A A A ors LBA Detection Time 0m1 4 00000000 to H 0000870F 0108888 Jo fe Ja Te gt Not used 0200 Po Alarm 1 Type CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 EE 0300 Alarm 1 Type CH3 TCA 0400 Alarm 1 Type CH4 TC4 ES INE AE Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O dec imal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit type Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 E4 A4 CT1 Assignment H 00000000 Disabled 0 1 TC2 H 00000001 Control output 1 1 H 00000002 Control output 2 2 H 00000003 Control output 3 3 H 00000004 Control output 4 4 Heater Burnout 1 Latch H 00000000 Disabled n TC2 H 00000001 Enabled 1 Heater Burnout 1 Hysteresis H 00000001 to H 000003E8 0 1 to 100 0 pot Ja
229. mand Code Request Bits 0002 Multi Executes the operation command each time the value in the Operation Command Code changes Note To change the Request Bits first set the Request Bits to 0000 then change the setting The same applies when periodically executing the same operation command Example Changing a Single Action to a Multi Action 1 2 3 1 For a single action the Response Bits are set to the single action value 0001 Note The Request Bits cannot be changed directly to 0002 because the setting will not be accepted 2 Change the Request Bits to 0000 then confirm that the Response Bits have been set to 0000 3 Then change the Request Bits to the multi action setting of 0002 e Each set of Request Bits has a corresponding set of Response Bits Once the Request Bits have been set the Response Bits operate in the order shown in the following table Order of action 1 The PLC sets the Request Bits 2 The EJ1 performs a single action 3 The EJ1 sets the Response Bits to the same value as the Request Bits 4 The PLC clears the Request Bits 5 The EJ1 clears the Response Bits PLC processing EJ1 processing Sets the Request Bits l 1 to 0001 2 Single action Single action completed 3 Sets the Response Bits to 0001 5 Clears the Response Bits Clears the Request Bits 1 The PLC sets the Request Bits 2 The EJ1 sets the Response Bits to the same value as
230. mmunications settings are used e EDU Port A The following settings are fixed Baud rate 38 4 kbps Communications data length 7 bit Communications stop bits 2 bit Parity Even bit 156 Communications Settings Section 6 1 e EDU Port B Parameter name Setting range Default Setting method Unit number 00to63 o Swuswe Port B communica 0 CompoWay F 0 CompoWay Communications tions protocol 1 Modbus F Port B communica 3 9 6 kbps Communications tions baud rate 19 Port B communica 7 7 tions data length 6 bit Port B communica O 1 1 2 bit Communications tions stop bits 1 2 bit m bit Port B communica 0 None 1 Even bit Communications tions parity 1 Even 2 Odd bit Port B send data O to 99 ms 5 ms Communications wait time 0 Note Always set the port B communications protocol to CompoWay F 0 6 1 2 Unit Number Setting The unit number is set first The setting is made on SW1 and SW on the front of the EJ1 For information on the setting method refer to 1 1 4 Using Setting Switches 6 1 3 Other Communications Settings The communications baud rate communications data length communica tions stop bits communications parity and send data wait time are set using communications Use communications with the default communications set tings to change any of these settings Refer to 6 4 2 Write to Variable Area for information on how to c
231. nbe 0004 Programiess Upload Setings 4 fs NM e angea fogs Programas Uca Setingss E E AICA operation O E EE E oar Programiess Upload Settings 308 sr uu m A A Ec ELE 025B EE Programless Upload Settings 603 Variable CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit type Category Add Address ress TC2 Canoe ooa PresamiessDownesdSeUngsd o o o iO 3 ie IS O 0540 ses wu fo operation Note Parameters with the following mark are supported only by version 1 1 Temperature Controllers Refer to Functional Upgrades on page xxii for details on upgraded functionality 228 Parameter List Appendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit Target Unit E Dio Category Add Address TC4 ype ress TC2 DA Canbe 0100 GSZA1 CH Slpe H O000000010H O0000FAO 0 010400 0 1000 num Je OA Touring 0101 GSZA1 CH2 Slope 1 H 0000000010H 00000FA0 00104000 100 0 NUM le operation 0102 GSZA1 CH3Slope H O000000010H O0000FAO 0 010400 0 to00 NUM e 0103 G3zA1 CH4Stpe H 0000000010 H OO000FAO 0 0 to 400 0 1000 NUM je 0104 G3ZA1 CH5Slpe H 0000000010 H OO000FAO 0 0 to 400 0 1000 NUM e 0105 G3ZA1 CH Slpe H 0000000010 H OO000FAO
232. ncel Save RAM Data Register Unit Configuration ERE EIES ESA EZEZ EXE EXE 1 0 Specified Unit 1 All Units 2 0 According to related information 1 All channels 3 00 Backup 01 RAM 4 00 Channel 1 01 Channel 2 10 Channel 3 11 Channel 4 b 00 Clear 01 Register Example Operation Command Code to execute Run for channel 1 of Unit No 1 Command code for Run Unit specification 01 mE Channel 1 I O 9 OOOO H 2810 142 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Sample Operation Command Codes for Programless Communications Command code Oo Run O oj oj o o o o joI jo oO oO Stop o ojojo ojojojojo 100 AT Execute ojojojojo oOojojojojo ojo AT Cancel h 1 All Units specified command code Channel wer M o 0 o BE 2 2 2 o mb Ojojojojo jio jo o jo o o o j o jo jo j o ojo o o jojo oj o o o jo o ojo jo joij o o oj o o o o o oi jo o O oj ojojojo jo jojo jojoj j 5 5 5 J Jojojojojojoj jo o jo o o o o oijo j o o o jo oI jo jo ololoj oioijol ojoi oj olio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ol ololo ololioloio o o o ojo olojolololololololjolololololojolololololojololololololjolololololololololololojololololo olojojlolololololololololololojololjolololojololololololjolololololololololo
233. nd 63 Be sure not to set the same number for more than one Basic Unit e f distributed positioning is used for an EJ1 power must be supplied sepa rately to the terminal block on the End Units 28 Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 e When using distributed position connect like ports on the End Units e f port A on the terminal blocks is connected for distributed position then the port A connector can be connected to a computer using an E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable to use the CX Thermo EST2 2C MV3 to set the parameters for the distributed EJ1 B is B Bh ah es Sm Be ge alas aia aida de a sae ae Base Sas Gael Gael ias Cia e Cae Clase E E E es Se les Seles eles os Das falas elas EE JE ESI S2 e Sd Figg Gas Caf Cae Gas Gas Cae 160 1180 180 EJ111 TC4 or EJ1Ll TC2 Wiring for Distributed Placement
234. nd channel 2 process values The EJ1 set value will be continuously read if D1000 is set to 2 Set D1000 to O to stop reading the set value Data register Value Meaning Procedure step number and confirmation item Do 2 ResiResomsBis Step 2 Setto 2 by tne system Di o Setting Change Response Bits D2 fo Operation Command Response BS Da Communications Status 05 D1000 Read Request Bits Step 1 Set from PLC user program D1001 0 Seting Change Requests E Changing EJ1 Set Values Use the following procedure to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 set points change 1 2 3 Set D1004 and D1005 in PLC memory to 100 Set the Setting Change Request Bits D1001 to 1 Set the Setting Change Response Bits D1 to 1 Use the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software to confirm that the EJ1 channel 1 and channel 2 set points have changed to 100 To check op eration again set D1001 to O and once D1 has changed to O repeat the procedure from step 1 Do Um Data register Value Meaning Procedure step number and confirmation item DO 0 ReadhResponse Bits AA AAA O O U D1 Setting Change Response Bits Step 3 Set to 1 Dio00 o Read Request Bits a o e D1001 Setting Change Request Bits Step 2 Set from PLC user program D1002 0 Operation Command Request Bis Programless Communications Section 5 1 Data register Value Meaning Procedure step
235. nder 7 5 2 Multiple Write to Variable Area Function Error Cause code code H 86 H 01 Function code error A function code that is not supported was Hot Pirston coos enor erected nn supported was H 03 Variable data error e The command is too long e The command is not long enough e The command code does not match the related information in the write data H O4 Operation error e The command cannot be executed because the model or version is not the same e The command cannot be executed because operation is stopped e The command cannot be executed dur ing operation e The command cannot be executed due to a configuration error e The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received e The command cannot be executed because EEPROM is currently being written e The command cannot be executed dur ing reset including startup e The command cannot be executed dur ing error latch status e The command cannot be executed in the current control mode e The command cannot be executed in the current output mode e The command cannot be executed in manual operation mode e The command cannot be executed in tuning mode Hoe Normalena X The service was processed normally Command Response Example The following command executes the RUN operation command for channel 1 Slave address H 01 Write data H OAO0 OA Operation command RUN 00 Related information channel 1
236. ng Operation with SYSMAC CS CJ Series PLCs on page 111 MELSEC Q Series The settings are the same as made when checking operation Make settings based on the following table if the baud rate or transmission settings need to be changed Channel Switch number Bit position Description SWO1 bO to 7 Transmission settings b8 to 15 Baud rate setting SWO2 EI Communications protocol setting SWO03 bO to 7 Transmission settings b8 to 15 Baud rate setting SW04 Communications protocol setting Communications protocol setting setting Common for both swi ___ fen number setting CH1 and CH2 128 Programless Communications Section 5 1 E Transmission Settings Setting bo Operation setting Independent Linked 0 JE br Data bis See note 7 lb h b3 Evemoddpay See note Odd Even bi Stop bis See mote h bo 9 JE bs Checksum No Ws be Write duringRUN Prombied Alowed i b7 Setting modifications Prohibited Allowed Note Change the settings if required If changes are made make the same settings on the EJ1 E Baud Rate Setting 192 ps 57 6 mum 115 2 kbps See note OBH recommended Note If both channel 1 and channel 2 are used on the QJ71C24 R2 make sure that the total baud rate for both channels is 115 2 kbps or less Note Make the same settings on the EJ1 E Communications Protocol Setting Communications protocol setting Programless Communication
237. ng is 0 0 or 100 0 When the set value is 0 0 the HB alarm is turned OFF When the set value is 100 0 the HB alarm is turned ON e Set the total current value at normal heater operation to 100 A or less 90 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 m Examples 1 Single phase Heaters Example 1 Using a 200 VAC 1 kW Heater Normal operation Heater burnout occurred 5A AC line AC line 200 V Burnout To CT input To CT input The heater current is 5 A when the current is normal and O A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows l Normal current value Burnout current value Heater burnout detection current n _ _ __ 2 5 0 s CODE Example 2 Using Three 200 VAC 1 kW Heaters Normal operation Heater burnout occurred 15 A gt AC line 10 A gt AC line To CT input To CT input The heater current is 15 A when the current is normal and 10 A when there is a burnout so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows Normal current value Burnout current value 2 Heater burnout detection current 15 10 125 A 91 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 2 Three phase Heaters a Delta Connection Example Using Three 200 VAC 2 kW Heaters Normal Operation 17 3 A gt Load Heater example 200 V 200 V To CT input 17 3 A gt To
238. ning AT When autotuning AT is executed the MV is forcibly changed the control subject s characteristics are observed with the limit cycle method and the best PID constants are automatically set for the SP during execution e Autotuning cannot be executed while control is stopped during manual mode operation or during ON OFF control e Use an operation command to execute autotuning For details refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands e The only parameters that can be received during autotuning are RUN STOP Auto Manual AT Execute Cancel Alarm 1 2 3 Latch Cancel and Alarm Latch Cancel All Other parameters cannot be changed e f the STOP parameter is set during autotuning autotuning will be can celled and operation will stop Autotuning will not be restarted even if RUN is set again e Normally the following parameters are left at their default settings Variable type oen E5 A5 AT Calculated Gain Common AT Hysteresis Channel 0 1 to 999 9 EU See note 2 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude Common 5 0 to 50 0 Temporary AT Execution Judgment Deviation 0 0 to 999 9 EU 150 0 Channel See note 2 Conditions for use The control method must be set to standard control and 2 PID control Note 1 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1
239. ning the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors 200 8 5 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Measurement Errors 209 8 6 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Temperature Control Errors 210 8 7 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Output Errors 212 8 8 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors 213 2391110 ue 499 933419919 3 2 9 999 479 999 9 G9 92 94 dO 909 2 EO BHO X 9929 9992294922229 9993299 929 9 99 99 9 ZOD Revision History ooooooooooooo ooooooororoo 263 About this Manual This manual describes the EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers and includes the sections described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to set up or operate an EJ1 Modular Temperature Controller e Overview Section 1 Outline describes the features nomenclature and functions of the EJ1 e Setup Section 2 Preparations describes the preparations required to use the EJ1 including installation wir ing and switch settings e Application Examples Section 3 Typical Control Examples describes the basic applications of the EJ1 using specific con trol examples e Functions of EJ1 Basic Units TC4 TC2 Section 4 Basic Units TC4 TC2 describes the functions of EJ1 Basic Units e Functions of the EJ1 Advanced Unit
240. nje resetting Note 1 Not valid when an NT Link is being used 2 Set the Delay between Outputs parameter to an even number If an odd number is set the next smaller even number will be used 3 Parameters with the following mark are supported only by version 1 1 Temperature Controllers IE Refer to Functional Upgrades on page xxii for details on upgraded functionality 237 Parameter List Parameter name CompoWay F Modbus type Category Add Address ress Enabled 0000 Event Input 1 Assignment after resetting 0001 EN Event Input 2 Assignment Not used 0010 Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment F2 B2 Appendix TC4 TC2 H 00000000 Disabled 0 Common TC2 H 00000001 All channels Bank bitO 1 H 00000002 All channels Bank bit1 2 H 00000003 All channels Stop 0 Run 1 3 H 00000004 All channels Run 0 Stop 1 4 H 00000005 All channels Auto 0 Manual 1 5 H 00000006 All channels SP mode Local 0 Remote 1 6 Not used H 00000020 CH1 Bank bitO 32 H 00000021 CH1 Bank bit1 33 H 00000022 CH1 Stop O Run 1 8 H 00000023 CH1 Run 0 Stop 1 35 H 00000024 CH1 Auto 0 Manual 1 36 H 00000025 CH1 SP mode Local 0 Remote 1 37 H 00000040 The rest are the same as channel 1 64 The rest are the same as Event Input 1 Assignment Setting monitor range H 00000000 Disabled 0 20 Common H 00000001 Temperature Co
241. no input error C40402 H0003 i e bits O and 1 are ON Channel 4 alarms 1 and 2 are ON C4 84 0000 C4 84 0401 Channel Status i Device Error BitO RUN STOP 1 Configuration Error Bit1 Auto Manual 0 Channel Error 04 84 000B Bit2 AT Execute Cancel 0 Bit3 SP Mode 0 Not used 0 Bit4 Not used 0 Expand Communications Error O Bit5 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit6 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit7 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit8 nput Error 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit9 RSP Input Error 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 Bit 10 Not used 0 I O Error 0 Not used 0 Bit 11 Not used 0 Lower level I O Error 9 Not used 0 Bit 12 Not used 0 I O Alarm 0 Not used 0 Bit 13 Not used 0 Lower level I O Alarm O Not used 0 Bit 14 Not used 0 I O Notification 0 Not used 0 Bit 15 Not used 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 C4 84 0402 Not used 0 Channel Alarm Status Not used 0 Bito Alarm 1 1 Not used 0 Bit Alarm 2 1 Bit2 Alarm 3 0 Bit3 Not used 0 Bit4 Heater Overcurrent 0 Bit5 HB Alarm 0 Bite HS Alarm 0 Bit7 OC Alarm 0 Bit8 Not used 0 Bit9 Not used 0 Bit 10 Not used 0 Bit 11 Not used 0 Bit 12 Set Point Limiter Out of Range O Bit 13 Set Value Limiter Reverse Operation O Bit 14 MV Limiter Reverse Operation O Bit 15 Scaling Reverse Operation 0 The ES
242. ns for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control 4 3 3 Selecting the Output Mode Either standard control or heating cooling control can be selected as the out put method Variable type Setting range Default E5 A5 Output Mode Selection 0 Standard control Channel 4 Heating cooling control Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Standard Control This mode performs standard heating or cooling control Set the Direct Reverse Operation parameter to reverse operation for heating control or direct operation for cooling control B Direct Operation Cooling and Reverse Operation Heatin Direct operation cooling refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased in response to an increase in the process value Alternatively reverse operation heating refers to control where the manipulated variable is decreased in response to an increase in the process value Manipulated variable Manipulated variable 100 LL 100 DD 0 Time 0 Time A A Low Set value High Low Set value High temperature temperature temperature temperature Direct operation Reverse operation For example when the process value PV is lower than the set point SP in a heating control system the manipulated variable increases according to the difference between the PV and SP Accordingly this is reverse operation in a heating control system and direct oper
243. nsistent frame format to facilitate communications between more than one compo nent and between personal computers and components FINS Factory Interface Network Service The FINS protocol provides message communications between control lers in OMRON FA networks Command Frame Format Text STX UnitNo Sub address SID FINS mini command text ETX BCC Blut T 1 2 2 1 1 1 BCC calculation range This code indicates the beginning of the communications frame Always set to 02H e Set the unit number that is set on SW1 and SW2 on the EJ1 e Specify XX for a broadcast transmission No responses will be returned for broadcast transmissions e No responses will be returned from unit numbers other than the ones in the above range Sub address Not used by the EJ1 Always set to 0 SID Not used by the EJ1 Always set to 0 FINS mini com This text is the command For details refer to 6 3 FINS mini mand text Text ETX This code indicates the end of the communications frame Always set to 03H The BCC calculation result from the unit number to the ETX 158 Frame Configuration Section 6 2 BCC Calculation Example STX Unit No Sub address SID FINS mini command text ETX BCC 30H 30H 30H 30H Ee 35H 30H 30H BCC 30H 630HG30HG30HG30HO30H035H 630H0930H0 08H 36H XOR exclusive OR calculation Note No response will be returned unless the frame contains all elements up to the ETX and BCC
244. nt 57 Control Output 4 Assignment 57 Control Period 1 to 4 58 CT1 Assignment 87 CT2 Assignment 87 Dead Band 69 Decimal Point C1 to C4 60 Decimal Point Position 53 Delay between Outputs 58 Derivative Time 65 Direct Reverse Operation 67 Disturbance Gain 79 Disturbance Judgment Width 79 Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function 79 Disturbance Rectification Band 79 Disturbance Time Constant 79 Event Input 1 or 2 Assignment 101 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Detection 88 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Hysteresis 88 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Latch 88 Heater Current Value 1 or 2 Monitor 88 96 Heater Overcurrent 1 or 2 Detection 96 Heater Overcurrent 1 or 2 Hysteresis 96 Heater Overcurrent 1 or 2 Latch 97 Index HS Alarm 1 or 2 95 HS Alarm 1 or 2 Hysteresis 95 HS Alarm 1 or 2 Latch 96 Hysteresis Cooling 64 Hysteresis Heating 64 Input Digital Filter 56 Input Shift 1 53 Input Shift 2 53 Input Value 1 for Input Correction 53 Input Value 2 for Input Correction 53 Integral Time 65 Internal SP 71 Latch Cancel 172 174 LBA Band 98 LBA Detection Time 98 LBA Level 98 Leakage Current Value 1 or 2 Monitor 95 Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 76 Linear Output 1 2 Type 61 Local SP Change 142 172 174 187 Local SP Monitor 72 LSP Change 172 174 Manual 140 172 Manual MV 74 Manual Reset Value 69 MV at PV Error 75 MV Lower Limit 76 MV Upper Limit 76 Operation During Error Select
245. ntilation holes on the product 4 Besure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals 5 Use specified size M3 width 5 8 mm or less crimped terminals for wiring Use a gage of AWG22 to AWG14 equal to cross sectional area of 0 326 to 2 081 mm for power supply lines and a gage of AWG28 to AWG16 equal to cross sectional area of 0 081 to 1 309 mm for all other lines The stripping length is 6 to 8 mm Up to two wires of same size and type or two crimped terminals can be inserted into a single terminal 6 Donot wire terminals that do not have an identified use 7 To reduce inductive noise keep the wiring for the products terminal block away from power cables carrying high voltages or large currents Also do not wire power lines together with or parallel to product wiring Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise in particular motors transformers solenoids magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance component When a noise filter is used at the power supply first check the voltage or current and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the product Allow as much space as possible between the product and devices that generate powerful high frequencies high frequency welders high frequency sewing machines etc or surge 8 Use the product within the rated load and power supply 9 Ma
246. ntroller error 1 H 00000010 Event input 1 16 H 0000001 1 Event input 2 17 H 00000012 Event input 3 18 H 00000013 Event input 4 19 H 00000014 Bus input 1 20 H 00000015 Bus input 2 21 H 00000016 Bus input 3 22 0011 mM Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment The rest are the same as Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Bie Not used 0020 Bus Input 1 Assignment 0021 Bus Input 2 Assignment 0022 Bus Input 3 Assignment 238 H 00000000 Disabled 0 Common H 00000001 All channels Bank bitO 1 H 00000002 All channels Bank bit1 2 H 00000003 All channels Stop 0 Run 1 3 H 00000004 All channels Run 0 Stop 1 4 H 00000005 All channels Auto 0 Manual 1 5 H 00000006 All channels SP mode Local 0 Remote 1 6 Not used H 00000020 CH1 Bank bitO 32 H 00000021 CH1 Bank bit1 33 H 00000022 CH1 Stop 0 Run 1 34 H 00000023 CH1 Run 0 Stop 1 35 H 00000024 CH1 Auto 0 Manual 1 36 H 00000025 CH1 SP mode Local 0 Remote 1 37 H 00000040 Channel 2 The same as channel 1 64 H 00000060 Channel 3 The same as channel 1 96 TC4 H 00000080 Channel 4 The same as channel 1 128 The rest are the same as Bus Input 1 Assignment Parameter List Appendix Setting monitor range Target Unit TC4 TC2 0030 Bus Output 1 Assignment H 00000000 Disabled 0 TC4 4 Common o H 00000001 Temperature Controller
247. number and confirmation item Doos fo Operation Command Code D1004 Channel 1 Set Point Step 1 Set from PLC user program D1005 Channel 2 Set Point Step 1 Set from PLC user program B If Not Operating Correctly Check the following items if the operation is incorrect Are the wiring and settings correct e Was the power turned OFF once the EJ1 and PLC settings had been completed The EJ1 settings are enabled only after the EJ1 is reset e The Programless Communications Receive Wait Time may be too short Hefer to Adjusting Communications Time with PLC on page 127 and change to a longer wait time Checking Operation This section describes how to check operation for the configuration shown with the MELSEC An below AnS FX3UC Series EJ1 MELSEC An AnS FX3UC series PLC HFU TC EDU RS 232C 485 422 Unit No 0 1 2 d 1 Connect the EJ1 and PLC Connect the EJ1N HFU and Computer Link Unit as shown in the following diagram 119 Programless Communications Section 5 1 120 e RS 232C MELSEC An AnS FX3UC series PLC EJ1N HFUL NFLK HS 232C zo AD sm ss 7 as Note 1 AJ71UC24 pin numbers are given in parentheses 2 Pins 7 and 8 do not need to be connected for the FX3UC Turn ON pin 8 of SW2 to set RS 232C e When using an An AnS PLC disable checking the RS 232C CD terminal at buffer memory address 10BH Setting Example Xn7 H108 Programless
248. o 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 Variable type Setting range Default F2 B2 Event Input 1 or 2 Assignment O to 69 Common Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power EV2 can be set in the same way Channel 2 is turned ON Controlling Operation with e Operation can be switched by OFF to ON or ON to OFF event input tran the Event Input s ON OFF sitions Status B Stop 0 Run 1 Run 0 Stop 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 Stop y Run 7 Run 0YStop 1 Auto OyManual 1 Local SP 0 Remote SP 1 See note Local SP Remote SP Note This function can be used only when the Remote SP Enable parameter is set to 1 Enable 101 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 4 7 3 Internal Buses TC4 and TC2 Note Bus l O Assignments Note 102 The EJ1 has three built in buses I O can be allocated to these buses so sim ple sequences can be created by assigning signals that are output to the bus Bus Output Assignments and assigning functions that operate according to bus signals Bus Input Assignments 1 Bus inputs cannot be used if a Basic Unit is used without
249. o applicable A e MELSEC PLCs Set value Ava O default Data registers D 1 Link registers W Note Not supported by the FX3UC File registers R Note Expansion registers R for the FX3UC Note Make the programless upload settings in the Programless Communica tions Upload Data Area and the programless download settings in the Programless Download Data Area 2 Reset the EJ1 to enable settings B Programless Communications Upload Download Start Address Variable Type F0 BO Used to set the start address in the memory area set as the Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area for the parameters set as the Programless Upload Download Settings e The parameters will occupy the amount of PLC memory set in the Pro gramless Upload Download Settings from the address set as the Pro gramless Communications Upload Download Start Address 126 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e Refer to the following table and set a start address within the accessible range Programiess PLC area Setting Defadt Programless Programless Communications Communications Upload Start Download Start Address Address NT Link 1 N E 0000 to 9999 500 Communications range Protocol 1 000 for version MC protocol La registers 0000 to 9999 v1 1 format 5 Link registers 0000 to 1FFF AnA AnU CPU File registers 0000 to 9999 Common Com mands Note 1 Make sure the same addre
250. o 323 1 Test Data Up to 323 0143H The test data must be within the following ranges depending on the com munications data length Communications data length Test data ASCII H 20 to H 7E and H A1 to H FE ASCII H 20 to H 7E 2 Response Codes Response code Error name Cause 1001 Command too long The command is too long 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 171 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 11 Operation Commands The following parameter settings are made using operation commands e Write Mode e Software Reset e Run e Stop e Manual e Automatic e AT Execute e AT Cancel e Bank 0 Change to LSP Change e RSP Change Reset Error Bank 3 Change e Alarm 1 to Alarm 3 Latch Cancel e All Alarm Latch Cancel e Save RAM Data e Parameter Initialization e Save RAM Data 2 Register Unit Configuration E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Command Related code information 3101015 2 2 2 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code 3101 1015 2 2 4 1 Command Code by Unit and Related Information Command code TC related information HFU related information Write Mode 04 00 Backup 01 RAM Software Reset Always 00 Run OA 00 to 03 Channel Stop FF All channels oc 0E 100 AT Execute OF 20 1 22 Remote SP Change 23 Alarm 1 Latch Cancel 00 to 03 Channel ob mb mob m m o Co Ames 37 38 39 3B Save
251. o 999 9 EU in units of 0 1 EU See note A 4 imegaime 109988 ms OA Dematve me oowes snust oo Controlperiod oss meos o 0 0 to 100 095 in units of 0 19 E GUN depends on input type Sampingpeod faos AA 20 MO min at 800 VDO 600 VAC 50 60 Hz for 1 min between current carrying terminals of different polarity Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz 20 m s for 2 hours each in X Y and Z directions Shock resistance 150 m s max 3 times each in 6 directions on X Y and Z axes Degree of protection Rear case IP20 Terminal section IPOO Case IP20 Memory protection EEPROM non volatile memory number of writes 100 000 EN Weight E T 160 Note 3 W 0 5 of indication value PV or 3 C whichever is greater 1 digit max PLII 0 5 of indication value PV or 2 C whichever is greater 1 digit max The indication accuracy of K T and N thermocouples at a temperature of 100 C or less and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is 2 C 1 digit maximum The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 C or less is unrestricted The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200 C or less is 3 C 1 digit max 4 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as a setting of 1 e Influence of Temperature or Voltage R S
252. odbus Parameter name Setting monitor range able Category Add Address TC4 ress TC2 D3 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 See note 1 0 EU BANK gee oor ozat Bank S Proportional Band CHT H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 1 to 969 8 Seenote2 80 FU BANK e operation 0102 0ZA2 Bank Integral Time CHT H 00000000 to H 00000F9F 010 3989 ess s BANK e M 09 02A Bank Derivative Tine CHT H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 010 9883 400 s BANK e 0104 02A4 Bank 3 SP Ramp Rise Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to O EU min 0105 02A5 Bank 3 SP Ramp Fall Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 0000270F 0 to 9999 See note 1 EU s or BANK Function stops when set to O EU min Not used 0107 02A7 Bank 3 Manual Reset Value CH1 H 00000000 to H 000003E8 0 0 to 100 0 BANK 0108 02A8 Bank 3 Cooling Coefficient CH1 H 00000001 to H 0000270F 0 01 to 99 99 1 00 BANK O 0109 02A9 Bank 3 Dead Band CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199 9 to 999 9 See note a T BANK AR 2 Not used 010D o2AD Bank3AamVaue1 CHi H FFFFF81 to H 0000270F 1909 0 9990 Ses nate1 0 EU BANK e J 010E 02A Bank 3 Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 199910 9999 See note 1 o eu BANK e oror 024F Bank Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 CH H FFFFFGGI to H 0000270F 199910 9999 See note 1
253. ogramless communi cations 252 PID constants 65 PID settings 65 platinum resistance thermometer 51 PLC settings 128 programless communications 110 programless communications errors 144 programless communications protocol 125 programless communications upload download data area 126 programless communications upload download start ad dress 126 programless download settings 124 programless upload settings 124 PV process value xvii Q Q compatible Serial Communications Unit 111 QnA compatible Serial Communications Unit 111 R ratings 216 read from variable area 162 reducing communications time 139 remote SP 71 73 removing terminal blocks 15 Request Bit 130 Operation Command Request Bits 131 Read Request Bits 130 Setting Change Request Bits 130 response codes 174 response frame 159 restarting the standby sequence 84 restrictions during SP ramp operation 71 reverse operation heating 67 RS 232C 4 112 116 RS 422 116 RS 422A 110 RS 485 4 112 RSP Remote SP xvii RT robust tuning 78 S SAP xv 38 203 204 205 206 scaling 32 screw less clamp terminals 19 selecting the control method 64 send data wait time 157 179 sensor input ranges 220 Serial Communications Board 110 Serial Communications Unit 110 set point limiter 69 setting changes 136 multi action 137 single action 136 stop operation 137 setting control specifications 63
254. onger by increasing the Disturbance Time Constant The Disturbance Time Constant is normally left at its default setting of 1 Use this parameter for fine tuning when adjusting the Disturbance Gain alone is not sufficient 79 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 Temperature Disturbance Time Constant 1 S Disturbance Time Constant 2 lt seem 4 0 Time Note The waveform shown in the diagram above will vary depending on the control object s characteristics and the PID constant settings Starting Conditions The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function will operate after the pro for the Disturbance cess value PV has stabilized in the Disturbance Rectification Band and the Overshoot deviation is larger than the Disturbance Judgment Width Adjustment Function e When the Disturbance Judgment Width is positive the Disturbance Over shoot Adjustment Function will operate if a disturbance causes the pro cess value PV to fall When the Disturbance Judgement Width is negative the Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function will operate if a disturbance causes the process value PV to rise e The Disturbance Overshoot Adjustment Function will not operate in the following situations e When the Disturbance Rectification Band or Disturbance Judgment Width parameter is O e When the set point is changed when the set point change width ex ceeds the Disturbance Rectification Band e During autotuning e During ON
255. onnected NS Series NS series PT Programmable Terminals Staus Possiblecause Countermeasure The Smart Active Part SAP There is no power supply to Supply power from the EDU power does not communicate with the the EJ1 supply terminal EJ1 Connection NS series CJ1W CIF1 1 RS 422A Converter Connection port Connection port Port A Port B The Programmable Terminal connection is incorrect Refer to the Programmable Terminal RS 422A Converter and EJ1 manu als and wire the connection correctly The SAP is not compatible Use a SAP for the EJ1 with the EJ1 The SAP is not for direct con Use a SAP for direct Programmable nection Terminal connection The RS 422A switch settings are incorrect An E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable is con nected to port A and the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software is started The Programmable Terminal communications conditions are different from the EJ1 communications settings Refer to the product manual and make the correct switch setting for the communications conditions The EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Sup port Software and Programmable Terminals cannot be used at the same time Close the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software if using Program mable Terminals To temporarily use the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software either turn OFF the Programmable Terminal or move the Programmable Terminal to the System Screen an
256. oooooooo 85 AAR Alarm DEN a bb Rb ES 85 4 4 8 Alarm SP Selection sinere hd dake deen ed 86 4 4 9 Channel Alarm Status 0 0 oonan annaas ee aa 86 4 Detecins Current EMOS pearl dada cheese oe aie 87 Asse CT oASsioniment TOZ crear 87 4 5 2 Heater Burnout Alarm HB Alarm 0 0 0 87 4 5 3 Heater Short Alarm HS Alarm 0 0 0 0 000 94 4 5 4 Heater Overcurrent Alarm OC Alarm 96 4 6 Using the Loop Break Alarm LBA 00 00 ccc eee eee 98 49 50 4 7 4 6 1 Loop Burnout Alarm LBA 0 0 00 eee eee Other Functions TC4 and TC2 4 7 1 Bank Functi0D ooo o o 4 7 2 EventInputs TC2 oooo 4 7 3 Internal Buses TC4 and TC2 4 7 4 Using G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers 98 100 100 101 102 104 Setting Input Specifications 4 1 4 1 1 Section 4 1 Setting Input Specifications Input Type Note Set the input type to match the type of sensor being used Variable type Setting range Default EO AO Input Type Channel 0 to 29 Conditions for use No special conditions This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped List of Input Types input type Specifica Set value Platinum Pt100 O 200to850 300 to 1500 a 41 199 9t0 500 0 199 9 to 900 0 Hum 2 00101000 0 0to 210 0 JPt100 199 9 to 500 0 199 9 to 900 0 0 0 to 100 0
257. or the Output Scaling Upper and Lower Limits are set with the Decimal Point C1 to C4 parameters Change the decimal point position setting if necessary Variable type Setting range Default Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 to 4 1999 to 9999 1 0 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 to 4 1999 to 9999 10 Decimal Point C1 to C4 no deci ia point kkk kk kk k k kkk Conditions for use The Control Method must be set to 2 PID Control and the Control Output Assignment must be set to Control output heating or Control output cooling 1 These parameters can be set only when operation is stopped 2 Use 40 AT when output scaling has been set If 100 AT is used hunt ing will occur Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 Example Making All TC4 Outputs into CH1 Control Output Heating with Dif ferent Slopes Actual output Output Parameter name Set value Output 1 Control output 1 assignment Mp a out Output 2 Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 Scaling Upper Output Scaling Upper Limit 1 1 T Output 3 Output Scaling Lower Limit 1 EEUU NN Output 2 mM output 2 assignment CH1 Control out put heating Output 4 A N Set value of control 0 0 40 0 80 0 output assignment 60 0 100 0 Output Scaling Upper Limit 2 B00 Output Scaling Lower Limit 2 EE Decimal Point DecimalPointC2 Output 3 LL output 3 assignment CH1 Control ou
258. ot support bit access Fixed to 00 3 No of Write Data Items Write data length No of write data items For double word 8 digit variable type 20 max 0014H For word 4 digit variable type 27 max 001BH 4 Response Codes Response cade Errormame Case 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 1100 Bit position is not 00 Write data is out of setting range 2201 Operation error 2201 The command cannot be executed during operation 3003 Head only error An attempt was made to write to a read only variable type 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 7013 Operation error 7013 The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received 7014 Operation error 7014 The command cannot be executed during backup 7041 Operation error 7041 The command cannot be executed in manual opera tion mode 7042 Operation error 7042 The command cannot be executed in tuning mode 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 7013 7014 7015 Operation error 7015 The command cannot be executed during reset including startup 7041 i 7042 i 165 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 5 Composite Registration Read This service reads in order the contents of addresses specified in a variable area composite read registration
259. otice Printed in Japan 0307 0 5M 0206 M
260. pendix Vari CompoWay F Modbus Parameter name Setting monitor range Target A nle Category Add Address bd ype ress bd EDI ar m rerums ep p p IE Ir lace Tdi 8 Wr Pre E a X NND i nM m MN o M al ree e a o 3 o Gl Gl we e m lI oc p m Bu A Ll x WT iN oon dis ll cl Len Le aie e PA I LG m A ol i M A sl NN RN AA y A 59 JA RN a E ea e n NR A c pe A Cc al a 0150 DE G3ZA1 CT1 Heater OFF Current Moni eg H 00000000 to H 00000046 0 to 165 MERE tor V2 0151 EN G3ZA1 CT2 Heater OFF Current Moni gyp H 00000000 to H 000000A5 0 to 165 gj ee A tor V2 0152 m G3ZA1 CT3 Heater OFF Current Moni eg H 00000000 to H 00000046 0 to 165 poe ce tor s 0153 EE G3ZA1 CT4 Heater OFF Current Moni gyp H 00000000 to H 00000045 0 to 165 pes e ed tor V2 0180 G3ZA1 Send Standby Time See note 1 H 00000000 to H 00000083 0 to 99 1 ms NUM 0181 G3ZA1 Communications Timeout Time H 00000000 to H 0000003C 0 to 60 min NUM See note 1 Function stops when set to 0 0182 G3ZA1 Setting Operation for Errors H 00000000 Continue with error clear 0 NUM H 00000001 Continue without error clear 1 H 00000002 Stop 2 s 632 Om Vale Fr 00000000 to H 0000038 0 010 1000 200 v NUM e gt forea 0321 hysteresis 00000007 io HTo9o0000a T1070 1 A NUM je gt 0185 G3ZA1 SSR Drive Select
261. r CS1G CPULILIH CS1H CPULILJH based on function blocks Functionality that is the CJ1G CPULILIH CJ1H CPULILIH same as that of the CX Programmer is described CJ1M CPULILI CP1H XO000 0 In vue FO NomeIosee CP1H XALIJLILILI L CP1H YL JE IL JE I2 CPU Units SYSMAC CX Designer Ver 1 0 V088 Describes how to install and use the CX Designer NS CXDC1 V1 including screen data creation methods screen Operation Manual NS Series V082 Describes the NS series PT monitoring function NS5 SQOL1 B V1 V2 for CS CJ series PLC ladder programs including NS5 TQOI I B V2 the following information SRI LUUD e Overview and features NS10 TVOL B V1 V2 bcd NS12 TSOL B V1 V2 ES NSJ5 TQLILI B G5D e Troubleshooting N9J5 SQL IL B G5D NSJ8 TVLILI B G5D NSJ10 TVLILI B G5D NSJ12 TSLILI B G5D Ladder Monitor Operation Manual Ladder Monitor l O Comment Extracting Tool data transfer methods and system settings XVI Conventions Used in This Manual Meanings of Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in parameter names figures and in text explanations These abbreviations mean the following HFU EDU RSP LSP LBA Engineering unit See note Note EU stands for Engineering Unit EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units such as C m and g The size of EU varies according to the input type For example when the input temperature setting range is 200 to 130
262. r a response has been created after data has been received until the EJ1 switches to sending Host device Send status Send S 4 Receive Receive Send EJ1 Receive status Send status Response created Send data wait time The setting of the Send Wait Time parameter can be shortened to reduce the communications time at the host device as long as there are no problems 179 Frames Section 7 2 7 2 Frames Modbus Communications Protocol Commands from the host computer and responses from the EJ1 take the form of frames that conform to the Modbus RTU protocol The data included in command frames and response frames is described in this section In the following descriptions an H before a numeric value for example H 02 indicates that the value is a hexadecimal number Numbers or letters enclosed in quotation marks for example 00 are ASCII characters Modbus is a communications control method that conforms to the RTU Mode of the Modbus protocol specifications PI MBUS 300 Rev J of Modicon Inc Hefer to the OMRON specifications for detailed specifications of the Modbus protocol 7 2 1 Command Frames Example of CRC 16 Calculation 180 1 2 3 In RTU Mode each frame begins and ends with a silent time interval that is at least 3 5 characters long Slave Function address code Data CRC 16 CRC 16 calculation range Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long Slave address Specify
263. r to the HFU and distributed Units simultaneously Even if this is done there may still be problems with the startup timing depending on the EJ1 configuration and power supply capacity If problems occur at startup increase the delay between turning ON the power to the distributed Units and the HFU One HFU can manage up to 16 TC Units 4 channels x 16 Units 2 64 channels EDU Units are not included in the number of Units that can be managed Turn ON pin 8 on Swe 8 5 SIE Sa IER e e da lado T al e IBI le al e ze as LE GENES e SEO g LSI IE 7 age o HE OS LE 4 Al Oia iE N S SAES SA un Solo TE LES LES EJ1LJ HFU EJ10 TC4 EJ1LJ EDU EJ1L I TC4 EJ10 EDU or or EJ1O TC2 Eee Up to 16 Units can be connected side by side EDU Units are not counted in the number of Units that can be connected Precautions when Not e Up to 16 TC4 TC2 Units can be connected horizontally to one End Unit If Using an HFU End Units are connected with Communications Cables for distributed position then up to 64 Basic Units can be connected to one host device Note 1 The host device and End Units are not counted when calculating the limit of 64 Basic Units 2 Set the unit numbers of the Basic Units to between O a
264. ramless Communications Section 5 1 e Multi Action Operation of writing any parameters in the download area settings that have changed from the previous values is performed continuously 2 The EJ1 sets the Setting Change Response Bits PLC Upload Area 4 Download Area Adress Value Jaag HFU 1047 ig pecpone o Head Request Bits MEM 1 The Setting Change Request iim dd iid i Bits are set by the PLC Operation Comrffe JE Operation Command Response Bits EA ii m Communications Ww aw ERR I i 3 The EJ1 repeatedly reads the set values EJ1 e Stop Operation Operation is stopped after a series of operations has been completed 1 The Setting Change Request Bits are cleared by the PLC PLC Upload Area Download Area Read Response n Read Request Bits Oooo n D Operation Command 42 Operation Command Response Bits Request Bits mas Communications pd Operation Status Command Code Monitor value YYYY I I I 2 The EJ1 clears the Setting Change Response Bits Note 1 Always set the Setting Change Request Bits last If the Setting Change Request Bits are set before the set value is changed an unexpected value will be written 2 All programless download parameters will be updated when the Setting Change Request Bits are set If set values are not the same in EJ1 and PLC memory e g when the power is turned ON or the bank is changed always change the
265. ration Com mand Request Bits to restart communications Register parameters in the Programless Upload Settings or Programless Download Settings of the HFU only for Units that are connected Check the following and correct any problems and then restart operation e Check the communications line lengths trunk and branch e Check the communications line for shorts breaks or looseness e Check that terminating resistance is set only on the ends on the trunk line e Check for excessive noise Correct the operation code in the ladder pro gram in the PLC Determining the Error from the Status Section 8 3 8 3 Determining the Error from the Status The EJ1 status can be checked by using communications to read the Status Status is connected to other status data in a directory tree so the cause of the error can be checked or the channels for which there are alarms can be inves tigated by searching through the directory tree for the related status m Example of Using Status Information for Troubleshooting 1 Read the Device A Status C40000 for the TC4 Unit C40000 H0004 i e bit 2 is ON A channel error status bit is ON 2 Read Error Channel A Status C4000B C4000B HO008 i e bit 3 is ON An error or alarm has occurred for channel 4 3 Read the Channel Status C40401 and Channel Alarm Status C40402 of channel 4 C40401 HO001 i e bit O is ON Operation is stopped but there is
266. rect Make the correct settings The PID constant is unsuitable Execute autotuning AT e Set a suitable PID constant RUN STOP is set to STOP e Set to RUN Operation After Power ON is set to STOP status e Set RUN STOP to RUN To change to RUN the next time the power is turned ON set Operation After Power ON to Continue and turn OFF the power while in RUN mode The MV limiter is preventing the MV from increasing e Change the MV limiter to a suitable value A cooling fan is operating e Stop the cooling fan The Measured Temperature Increases Above the Control Temperature Possible cause Countermeasure Connection Measured temperature is wrong e Perform the action outlined in 7 5 The load is connected to the incorrect channel so the heater Rewire correctly is being controlled using control output from another chan nel The contacts for the relay driven by control outputs are e Replace with a higher quality relay welded together The SSR has short circuited Replace with a better quality SSR Leakage current from the SSR is flowing to the heater e Connect breeder resistance to prevent the action of leak age current Settings The normal and reverse operation settings are incorrect Make the correct settings The PID constant is unsuitable Execute autotuning AT e Set a suitable PID constant The MV limiter is preventing the MV from decreasing e Change the MV limiter to a suitable value The EJ
267. response is not returned A timeout will occur at the host device e he slave address in the received command is different from the commu nications unit number set in the EJ1 A parity error framing error or overrun error occurred due to a transfer error or other error e A CRC 16 code error occurred in the received command frame A time interval greater that 3 5 characters occurred between data while receiving a command frame In the following case the command is processed but a response is not returned e Broadcast transmission Slave address H 00 181 Function Codes Section 7 3 7 3 Function Codes Function code Name Descrpon 03 H 03 Multiple Read from Vari Reads from a variable area Multiple able Area variables that are consecutive can be read H 10 Multiple Write to Vari Writes to a variable area able Area Multiple variables that are consecutive can be written Broadcasting is possible Single Write to Variable Writes to a variable area or an opera Area tion command Broadcasting is possible Echoback Test Performs an echoback test 182 Variable Areas Section 7 4 7 4 Variable Areas The areas used for data exchange when communicating with the EJ1 are called the variable areas Present values can be read and set values can be read and written using the variable areas Operation commands do not use the variable areas Operation commands and Microprocessor
268. revious version Revision code Date Revised content February 2006 Original production 02 February 2007 Revised for addition of version 1 1 EJ1 Temperature Controllers and version 2 G3ZA Power Controllers March 2007 Internal block diagram for TC4 corrected and parameter tables revised Modbus addresses added and mistakes corrected 02B March 2007 Corrections made including the following Page 118 Changed the data register value from D1000 to D1001 for the Setting Change Request Bits in Monitoring EJ1 Set Values Page 122 Added the baud rate for port C 263 OMRON OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Control Devices Division H Q Analog Controller Division Shiokoji Horikawa Shimogyo ku Kyoto 600 8530 Japan Tel 81 75 344 7080 Fax 81 75 344 7189 Regional Headquarters OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel 31 2356 81 300 Fax 31 2356 81 388 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 1 East Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 U S A Tel 1 847 843 7900 Fax 1 847 843 8568 OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD 83 Clemenceau Avenue 1111 01 UE Square 239920 Singapore Tel 65 6835 3011 Fax 65 6835 2711 OMRON CHINA CO LTD Room 2211 Bank of China Tower 200 Yin Cheng Road M Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5037 2222 Fax 86 21 5037 2200 Authorized Distributor Cat No H142 E1 02B Note Specifications subject to change without n
269. ross sectional area 1 309 mm for all other cables The stripping length is 6 to 8 mm Use crimp terminals when wiring the terminals e Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0 40 to 0 56 N m Up to two wires of the same size and same type or two crimp terminals can be inserted into a single terminal Use the following types of crimp terminals for M3 screws L TO 5 8 mm max oy JC 5 8 mm max BEEN A 18 Wiring Terminals Wiring Procedure for Screw Less Clamp Terminals y B1 Li B2 B3 B4 HSUS LY AY A B6 j B5 B7 B8 3I B9 B10 LL 2 2 3 Wiring Power Supply Voltage LJ XJ J A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 Section 2 2 There are two holes for each terminal The hole on the right is the operating hole the hole on the left is the wire hole Insert a flat blade screwdriver with a width of 2 5 mm into the operating hole and then insert the wiring into the wire hole The wire will be clamped when the screwdriver is removed Use crimp terminals for wiring that match the cross sectiona
270. rror 243 Expand Unit 2 Communications Error 243 Expand Unit 3 Communications Error 243 Expand Unit 4 Communications Error 243 Expand Unit 5 Communications Error 243 Expand Unit 6 Communications Error 243 Expand Unit 7 Communications Error 243 Expand Unit 8 Communications Error 243 L LBA Loop burnout alarm xvii LBA detection time 99 limit cycle MV amplitude 77 linear output type 61 link data settings 123 local SP 73 loop burnout alarm LBA 98 LSP Local SP xvii M main unit functions 6 manual mode 74 manual MV 74 MC protocol 117 125 129 150 meaning of indicators 2 MELSEC Q Series 128 MELSEC Q QnA Series 111 MELSEC Q QnAS Series 115 116 125 129 memory allocation 125 Modbus communications protocol 180 model number legend 7 monitor 133 multi read 134 read settings 134 single read 133 stop operation 135 mounting and removing terminal blocks 13 mounting to DIN Rail 14 multi 131 multi input 6 multiple read from variable area 184 multiple write to variable area 185 MV at PV Error 80 Index MV at PV error 75 MV at Stop 75 MV limiter 75 N names of parts on front panel 2 no response 181 NT Link 125 O OC Heater overcurrent xvii ON OFF control 64 one point shift 54 open in alarm 85 operation after power ON 63 operation at startup 71 operation command 138 multi operation command 139 single operation command 138 stop op
271. ry PLC Memory HFU No 0 Upload area HFU No 1 HFU No 0 Upload area Upload area HFU No 1 Upload area Operation and Precautions ll Read Write Period for PLC Memory When more than one HFU is connected communications will be performed in the following order according to communications unit numbers The read write period for PLC memory will thus be relatively long in comparison to the read write period for a 1 1 connection 012 Max communication unit number O0 gt 1 B Startup When more than one HFU is connected the HFU with communications unit number O is the master for the EJ1 Other HFUs will start communications after the master starts communications Be sure to turn ON the power to the master HFU first For HFUs that are not the master communications will start even if the power is not turned ON If the power to an HFU is not ON communications standby time will occur and so communications will increase in length by the time required for one cycle of communications with all Units E Power Interruptions If power is interrupted to one HFU communications will still continue for the other HFUs A communications standby time will occur for the HFU that does not have power and so communications will increase in length by the time required for one cycle of communications with all Units The operation of the HFU after power is restored is different for the master HFU and other HFUs A programless link error
272. s e When using the Output ON Scheduling function all of the Unit s outputs will operate with the OUT1 control period Example 1 Delay between Outputs O ms nt TC4 0 Control period Output ON Scheduling Method 1 4 Limit to 25 of the maximum MV Delay between Outputs MV for all channels gt ie 2 s 10 s x 20 OUT1 Delay between Outputs O ms OUT2 gt 2 5 s 10 s x 25 OUT3 OUT4 a Control period 10 s Example 2 Delay between Outputs 1 s Umit Control period 10s Output ON Scheduling Method 1 4 Limit to 25 of the maximum MV Delay between Outputs 1 000 ms 1s MV for all channels 59 Setting Output Specifications Section 4 2 2 s 10 s x 20 y T Control period 10 s Delay between outputs for four channels Note The Delay between Outputs parameter can be set to offset the ON time for each output The delay between outputs will however cre ate an OFF period between outputs making it appear that the con trol period has increased The actual power is 2 10 4 x 100 14 396 4 2 4 Output Scaling 60 Note A slope gradient and offset can be set for each value selected with the con trol output assignment The value selected with the control output assignment will be 100 when it equals the Output Scaling Upper Limit and the value will be 0 when it equals the Output Scaling Lower Limit The decimal point positions f
273. s Protocol MC Protocol Format 5 MC Protocol format 5 Note Make sure this setting is the same as the Programless Communi cations Protocol parameter E Station Number Setting Set to 0000H to match the EJ1 setting If the station number of the Serial Communications Unit is set to any value except 0 set the programless communications node number in the EJ1 to the same value MELSEC QnA QnAS Make the settings shown in the following table for the channels being used iS Settingswith Setting Station number switch OO Mode switch Dedicated protocol Binary mode Format 5 129 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Setting switch Setting Transmission Operation setting Independent operation specifications Dara bits 8 bits st a bit bis 0 Parity bit enable disable Even parity odd parity Note If both channel 1 and channel 2 are used make sure that the total baud rate for both channels is 115 2 kbps or less Note a If settings other than those listed above are made make the same settings on the EJ1 b Refer to the PLC operation manual for details on setting methods MELSEC An AnS FX3UC The settings are the same when confirming operation Refer to Checking Series Operation with the MELSEC An AnS FX3UC Series on page 119 5 1 4 Description of Operation Set values are read and changed and operation commands are executed by setting a value in a Request Bits allocated in a PLC memory area
274. s PLCs e The End Unit supplies power to connected Basic Units and HFUs I O Configuration and Main Functions Section 1 2 e An End Unit is always required when using the EJ1 e A total of up to 16 HFUs and Basic Units can be connected to one End Unit e The End Unit has two communications ports port A and port B Write Mode is valid for port B If settings are changed from port A they are always written to EEPROM When using port A be sure to consider the write life of the EEPROM e Two communications ports are provided for port A a connector and termi nal block connections e The connector communications port can be used as a tool port The End Unit can be connected to a computer via a special E58 CIFQ1 USB Serial Conversion Cable to make EJ1 settings using the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software e The terminal block communications port can be used to wire between more than one EJ1 for distributed positioning of the EJ1 Up to 64 HFUs and Basic Units can be connected this way 1 2 3 Model Number Legend TC4 and TC2 HFU Options 2 CT inputs 2 event inputs B Outputs Q 2 pulse voltage outputs N 2 transistor outputs Terminal type Unit name Screw terminals B Screw less clamp terminals TC4 Four channel Temperature Control Unit TC2 Two channel Temperature Control Unit Communications Unit name FLK Standard control
275. s differ slightly from the actual cur rent flowing to the heater Check the current value in an actual operating state in the Leakage Current Value Monitor parameter e f there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may become unstable To stabilize detection set a cur rent value difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters of less than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or more If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the diagram below Looping it through twice will double the detection current Load line CT 95 Detecting Current Errors Section 4 5 B HS Alarm Latch and Latch Cancel The HS alarm latch can be used to keep an HS alarm ON once it goes ON The latch can be released by executing an operation command Reset Error or Software Reset cycling the power or setting the HS Alarm parameter to 100 0 A Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands for details on the operation commands Variable type Setting range Default E4 A4 HS Alarm 1 or 2 Latch I O O Disabled 1 Enabled Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Installing Current For details refer to Installing Current Transformers CT HB Alarm on Transformers CT page 89 HS Alarm Calculating the Heater For details refer to Calculating the Heater Burnout Detection Current Value Short Detection on page 90 Current Value 4
276. s is ON C4 84 0102 C4 84 0202 ch 2 C4 84 0302 ch 3 ch 1 C4 84 0402 ch 4 Channel Alarm Status Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Not used Heater Overcurrent HB Alarm HS Alarm OC Alarm Bits 8 to 11 Not used Set Point Limiter Out of Range Set Value Limiter Reverse Operation MV Limiter Reverse Operation Scaling Reverse Operation 197 Determining the Error from the Status Section 8 3 Bits 8 to 9 Not used Bit 10 I O Error 4 I O Error Status C4 84 0005 Main Input 1 Count Error Main Input 2 Count Error Main Input 3 Count Error Main Input 4 Count Error Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used g Bits 12 to 15 Not used Lower level I O Error 1 Basic Unit Expand Unit Error C4 84 000F Expand Unit 1 Error Expand Unit 2 Error Expand Unit 3 Error Expand Unit 4 Error Expand Unit 5 Error Expand Unit 6 Error Expand Unit 7 Error Expand Unit 8 Error Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used I O Alarm 1 I O Alarm A Status C4 84 0006 BitO CT1 Heater Overcurrent Bit 1 CT2 Heater Overcurrent Bits 2 to 3 Not used Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used I O Alarm B Status C4 84 0007 CT1 HB Alarm CT1 HS Alarm CT1 OC Alarm Not used CT2 HB Alarm CT2 HS Alarm CT2 OC Alarm Not used Bits 8 to 11 Not used g Bits 1
277. se No error Error The upper and lower scaling limits are reversed Operation 248 Status Lists Appendix HFU CO Status C0 80 0001 sun Mc m oe eem EN UNIDO UNI Btt Notused o o S O Bt2 Notused o o ooo B8 Notused FP Bt4 Notued PE ECC Bt Noued PE EXA Bte Noued EXCITA EXC TI A o o ooo ENE oo o Bit12 TI o ooo o Bii8 Notused Biti4 Notued o S EXC EXCITA o o ooo EA EXIT ooo o ooo AA AAA Bit 19 Not used Bit20 20 Write Mode Mode Write Mode Backup Write mode can be confirmed S 21 EEPROM RAM RAM z Can confirm whether or not the setting is registered E E in e Bit 24 Not used used EE EDEN mer nues ONE OE EXC Bit29 Notused ss Bi30 Notused Bit 1 Notused o go Jo 249 Status Lists Appendix Device A Status C4 84 0000 Bit position Bit description Meaning Bit O Device Error No error Error There is a memory error Refer to Device Error Status Bit 1 Configuration Error No error Error There is an error in the device configuration Refer to Configuration Error A Status Bit 3 External RAM Error at No error Error There is a memory error Operation Internal Communica No error Error tions Error Bit 4 There is a programless communications error Set when one of the programless error status bits turns ON The internal communications error status however is not
278. sed Bit 8 Configured Registration No error Error There is a memory error Data Error Bit 9 Model Information Data No error Error There is a memory error Error Bit 12 Model Information Mis No error Error There is a memory error matching Error 24 mm Status Lists Appendix Configuration Error A Status C4 84 0002 Bit position Bit description Meaning Undefined Expand Units A Unit that is not recognized is connected Bir nous O S 0 LLL Too Many Expand units More than 9 G3ZA Units are connected Expand Unit Failure There is an error in communications with the G3ZA Bit 4 Expand Unit Connec No error Error A communications response has not been received tion Fault from a G3ZA after it was registered in the configura tion Bms osa B6 Nouwed B7 Noted O B8 Notuwed B9 ose AO Br Note E AA E MAA A AA ANN O MN ULLLLLIIZIL Configuration Error B Status C4 84 0003 Bit position E Bit description Bit O Expand Unit 1 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA1 Bit 1 Expand Unit 2 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA2 Bit 2 Expand Unit 3 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA3 Bit 3 Expand Unit 4 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA4 Bit 4 Expand Unit 5 Error No error Error There is an error in communica
279. sed Up to 16 Basic Units can be con nected to one EJ1C EDU End Unit to expand to a maximum of 64 chan nels Also the Temperature Controller s settings operation and monitoring can be performed from a Programmable Terminal without creating a commu nications program by using Smart Active Parts SAP Multi channel Control Section 3 2 3 2 2 Wiring Connect the Temperature Sensor to the input terminals according to the sen sor s input type Connect the Solid State Relays for zones 1 2 3 and 4 to output terminals OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4 respectively When an EJ1L1 TC4 is used wire the circuits as shown below EJ1 1 TC4 OUT4 OUT3 ODO Senos SADA ADD Heater plate 3 2 3 Setup The settings are made through communications The EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software can be connected using an E58 CIFQ1 Connecting Cable to set the parameters from a personal computer The following table shows the related parameter settings for this example 0006 K 20 0 to 500 00 OUT2 Control Output 2 Assignment Variable type E1 Address 0200 004F Channel 2 MV heating 008F Channel 4 MV heating CH1 Direct Reverse Operation Variable type E5 Address 0100 0000 Reverse default 0000 2 PID default CH1 Output Mode Selection Variable type E5
280. set Bit 6 Programless Link Error Error There is a programless communications error E I mE Brig Nouse o Bri Ntued O Device Error Status C4 84 0001 Bitdescription description E A QNI C a a B nous O LLL Big nouse OOOO LL Bts Nowed Y Bis Nouse O O LLL Biz j Nowed O O LLL Bte nousa No error Error Bit 12 Model Information Mis No error Error There is a memory error matching Error Bits Notused ooo oo o IN ETE o oo ooo Bit1S Notused JoJo 250 Status Lists Appendix Configuration Error A Status C4 84 0002 Bit position AA Bit description Meaning Bo nosa Be Nousd Big Nouws Bro nousa Bra Nousd Bts Noused Bre Nouse B7 owsa Big Notuses S OSS Bro Ntued OO DA A Ell NN Bs ore Br ose O Device B Status C4 84 0013 Bit position Bit description Bio Noused Bit 1 Save RAM 2 No error Error Power was turned OFF while saving RAM2 and not all data was registered B2 nouse O A LLL Bit 3 Registration of unit con No error Error Power was turned OFF during Unit configuration figuration Registration of registration or composite read registration and not multiple reads all data was registered Ba Nose OOOO O S LE ans Nouse OO LLL Bte Nouse J O SSS S y y Biz Nouse yy Write mode can
281. setting output specifications 37 setting the set point 69 setting the SP Ramp 70 setting the unit number 3 single 131 single write to variable area 186 slave address 180 181 Smart Active Parts SAP xv 38 203 204 205 206 SP set point xvii SP tracking 73 specifications 216 standard control 67 standby sequence 84 start control RUN 63 status lists 240 stop control STOP 63 support software 7 34 SYSMAC CS CJ Series 111 112 125 128 T TC2 xvii 6 17 TC4 xvii 6 16 temperature controller error 152 temperature inputs 52 temporary AT execution judgment deviation 77 terminal arrangement 16 terminating resistance 22 thermocouple 51 220 three position control 65 transfer output 61 twisted pair cable 23 two point shift 54 55 U unit configuration examples 26 unit number setting 157 179 USB Serial Conversion Cable 25 using tool ports 25 V V1 1 version 1 1 xxii W wiring 19 auxiliary outputs 21 communications 22 control outputs 20 CT inputs 21 event inputs 22 inputs 20 power supply voltage 19 wiring precautions 18 write to variable area 163 Index 261 Index 262 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No H142 E1 02B Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the p
282. ss is not allocated in both the Programless Up load Settings and Programless Download Settings 2 Reset the EJ1 to enable settings 3 The ranges of registers that can be used are different for the An series AnS series and FX3UC series PLCs Refer to the PLC manual for de tailed setting ranges Communications The following parameters are used to make the EJ1 communications settings Settings Set these parameters to the same conditions as the PLC Variable type Parameter name Setting Monitor values Port C Communications Baud Rate 3 9 6 kbps Common 4 19 2 kbps 5 38 4 kbps 6 57 6 kbps 7 115 2 kbps Port C Communications Data Length 0 7 bits Common 1 8 bits Port C Communications Parity 0 None Common 1 Even 2 Odd Port C Communications Stop Bits 0 1 bit Common 1 2 bits Port C Send Wait Time See Condiri O to 99 ms 5 ons for use Common Conditions for use The Programless Communications Protocol cannot be NT Link 1 N Note Reset the EJ1 to enable settings When using an NT Link use the default settings for all the above parameters Adjusting With programless communications the time from when the command is sent Communications to the PLC until a response is returned is monitored using the Programless Time with PLC Communications Receive Wait Time 127 Programless Communications Section 5 1 This time will differ depending on the PLC cycle time Consider the PLC system
283. starting with the lowest unit number Example In this example the G3ZA Units have been set to unit numbers 0 1 7 and 8 The following diagram shows how the G3ZA Units are associated with the EJ1 alta CK ela Unit 0 gt G3ZA1 es Tae ge B Es as a Unit 1 2 G3ZA2 Se lisa sey E Unit 7 gt G3ZA3 ES ES ES Sars SM ES s Unit 8 gt G3ZA4 asa ose ose Ses sa SES E e ar G3ZA O O O O POPODO POPODO DOPOD POOPODA OOOO GO OO POPSOPO PDOPOPOA f f 1 f 1 fF 301 21 M 2 nidum aim gt Ol POPOPSO POPOPSO POPOPSO POPBOSO DDOD POLPODO DDOD DDD O B 0 CORE TO CORE TO Unit No O Unit No 1 Unit No 7 Unit No 8 Unit number Variable type DA 9A G3ZA1 CH1 Slope G3ZA1 CH1 2 Slope 7 G3ZA2 CH1 Slope G3ZA2 CH1 2 Slope G3ZA3 CH1 Slope G3ZA3 CH1 2 Slope G3ZA4 CH1 Slope G3ZA4 CH1 2 Slope The G3ZA settings are read and written through the Basic Unit The Basic Unit has addresses allocated in its variable area for use with the G3ZA The G3ZA set valu
284. t 1 If any other settings are used change the setting for the EJ1 to the same settings 2 Refer to the user s manual for the PLC for setting methods 3 Make the EJ1 settings Make the following settings When using RS 232C turn ON pin 8 on SW 2 to select RS 232C No other settings are required Variable type SettingMonitor values FO BO Programless Communications Protocol 4 AnA AnU CPU Com Common mon Commands Port C Send Wait Time Common Port C Baud Rate Common 4 19 2 kbps For the default settings data registers in the PLC are allocated to the EJ1 monitor and set values as shown in the following table If the allocated words shown below are already in use change the words referring to Pro gramless Communications Upload Download Data Area Variable Type FO BO on page 126 and to Programless Communications Upload Down load Start Address Variable Type FO BO on page 126 Contents set value D01000 Read Request Bits D01001 Setting Change Request Bits 4 Check operation Turn OFF the power to the EJ1 and PLC and then turn the power back ON It does not matter which one is turned ON first Refer to the Basic Opera tions on page 118 and check the operation Programless Communications 5 1 3 Detailed Settings Link Data Settings Note Note Section 5 1 Link data settings are made to set which EJ1 values to monitor or change e Monitor The parameters to be monitored are set under
285. t put heating Output Scaling Upper Limit 3 E Output Scaling Lower Limit 3 ES Decimal Point Decimal PointC3 Output 4 a output 4 assignment CH1 Control out put heating Output Scaling Upper Limit 4 Output Scaling Lower Limit 4 ES Decimal Point C4 E 4 2 5 Transfer Outputs Output 1 and output 2 on Controllers with linear outputs can be used as trans fer outputs Use the following procedure 1 2 3 1 Set the parameter to be output on the transfer output The parameter to be output is set using the Control Output Assignment pa rameter Select one of the following values Refer to 4 2 1 Control Output Assignments for details on the assigning the control output Process Value Internal SP Local SP Remote SP Transfer Output Heat ing Transfer Output Cooling 2 Set the type of linear output Use the following parameter Variable type Setting range Default E1 A1 Linear Output 1 2 Type I O 0 4 20 mA 1 0 20 mA Conditions for use A Controller with linear outputs must be used 3 Setthe output range for the transfer output The range set for output scaling is used as the output range for the transfer output Refer to 4 2 4 Output Scaling for information on output scaling m Example The following example outputs the process value on a transfer output Input Type 6 20 0 to 500 0 C Control Output 1 Assignment 43 channel 1 process value Linear Output 1 Type 1 0 to 20 mA
286. tNo Comente SYSMAC CS Series W339 Provides an outlines of and describes the design CS1G H CPULJLT EV1 CS1G H CPUL IL H installation maintenance and other basic opera Programmable Controllers Operation Manual tions for the CS series PLCs SYSMAC CJ Series W393 Provides an outlines of and describes the design CJ1G CPUL IL CJ1M CPULILJ CU1G CPULILIP installation maintenance and other basic opera CJ1G H CPULILJH NSJO IL IL IL 1 B G5D tions for the CJ series PLCs NSJLI LIL TL TL B MS3D Programmable Controllers Operation Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series W394 Describes programming and other methods to use CS1G H CPULILI EV1 CS1G H CPULJL_IH CS1D the functions of the CS CJ series PLCs CPULILIH CS1D CPULILIS CJ1G CPUL IL CJ1M CPULIL 1 CU1G CPULILIP CJ1G H CPUL IL H NSJL LILILILI B G5D NSJU L TL ILL I B M3D Programmable Controllers Programming Manual SYSMAC CS CJ Series W340 Describes the ladder diagram programming CS1G H CPUL IL EV1 CS1G H CPULILIH CS1D instructions supported by CS CJ series PLCs CPULIL IH C81D CPUL IL IS CJ1G CPUL I CJ1M CPULIL I CJ1G CPUL IL IP CJ1G H CPULIL H NSJL LILILIL B G5D NSJLI LILIE IE B MSD Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual SYSMAC CS CJ NSJ Series W342 Describes the C series Host Link and FINS com CS1G H CPULILI EV1 CS1G H CPUI I JH munications commands used with CS CJ series CS1D CPUL IL
287. tain safety in the event of malfunction of the product take appropriate safety measures such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line 1X Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent operation failure malfunction or adverse affects on the performance and functions of the product Not doing so may occasionally result in unexpected events 1 The product is designed for indoor use only Do not use the product outdoors or in any of the following locations e Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment e Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere e Places subject to direct sunlight e Places subject to dust or corrosive gas in particular sulfide gas or ammonia gas e Places subject to intense temperature change e Places subject to icing or condensation e Places subject to vibration or strong shocks 2 Use and store the product within the rated ambient temperature and humidity ranges Mounting two or more Temperature Controllers side by side or mounting Temperature Controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the Temperature Controllers which will shorten their service life If the Temperature Controllers are mounted above each other or side by side use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers 3 To allow heat to escape do not block the area around the product Do not block the ve
288. te e Set the other parameters the same as the Serial Communi cations Unit as well i e data length 7 parity even and stop bits 2 The values in parentheses are the default set tings Refer to the PT and PLC manuals for PT and PLC communi cations settings See Related Manuals on page xiv Set the communications conditions for the Serial Communica tions Unit as follows User default settings User settings e Serial communications mode Serial Gateway e Data length 7 bit e Stop bits 2 bit e Parity Even bit e Baud rate Set the same baud rate as the EJ1 Refer to the CX Integrator Operation Manual W445 for details Note The Serial Communications Board SCB Unit SCU must be unit version 1 2 or later Refer to Unit Versions of CS CJ series Serial Communications Boards Units in the Serial Communications Board Unit Operation Man ual W336 for information on checking unit versions There is an HFU connected to the EJ1 Port B cannot be used for communi cations if an HFU is connected to the EJ1 Hint When Using HFUs Connect to port A on the Serial Communications Unit The following restrictions apply e The HFU cannot be used at the same time as the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software e The baud rate is fixed at 38 4 kbps If an HFU Is Not Required Disconnect the HFU and restart the EJ1 The baud rate and communications distance sometimes depend on the com municat
289. te 1 When more than one G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller is connected version 1 and ver sion 2 can be mixed Up to 8 G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers can be connected 2 Software version 2 of G3ZA Multi channel Power Controller can also be used with EJ1 version 1 0 e Advanced Unit HFU e Programless communications can be used with 1 N connections e The maximum number of parameters that can be specified for programless up down setting has been increased from 300 to 600 each e Connection is now possible to MELSEC QnA An AnS FX3uc series PLCs e A new setting read operation has been added to programless communications Setting Read 2 e The speed of programless communications has been increased e Either continue or stop can be selected for when errors occur in programless communications e Support Software Use version 3 20 or higher of the CX Thermo when using the upgraded functions e identifying Upgraded Models The new functionality can be used with version 1 1 V1 1 Check the label on the Temperature Con troller or the box to determine the version Models not marked Ver 1 1 are version 1 0 Box Label Temperature Controller Label Version We EJT OO TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER De AA VOR MULTI RAN SS yy V LAV UNIS ve TU r LOTNo QTY 1 OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN
290. te Either turn ON power to the G3ZA first or turn ON power to the G3ZA and EJ1 simultaneously Connect a terminating resistor only to the end G3ZA node gs 110 to 125 Q 1 2 W e El KB 5 Qua Cen EJ1LI TCA EJ1C EDU Or EJ10 TC2 O O O 00000 000000 000000 PPPOP PDOPSPOPSOS LOVES cot feel eek a col BOOOOO SADIOS 0590 ORDOSO OOOO 2040000 O O O G3ZA Up to 8 G3ZA Power Controllers can be connected to one TC Unit Restrictions on Connections and e Always connect the HFU on the left side of the TC4 TC2 Units Incorrect Correct Placement e e ED o E E E e PNS P A EN Sy L j EJ1LJ TC4 EJ1LJ HFU EJ10 HFU EJ1LI TCA or Or EJ1LJ TC2 EJ1L 1 TC2 30 Unit Configuration Examples Section 2 4 e Do not connect an EDU directly to an HFU Always connect the EDU to a TCA TC2 Incorrect a rs ep elise Sl KSSS PNAN Ep EJIL HFU EJ10 EDU Correct 7 e stele itl set SD PNY S QI
291. tegral Time Increased I It takes a long time for the process value to reach the set point It takes time to achieve a stable state but overshooting undershooting and hunting are reduced Overshooting and undershooting occur Hunting occurs The process e Effect of Changes to D Derivative Time value rises quickly Increased D Decreased D Overshooting and undershooting are increased and it takes time for the process value to reach the set point Set value Overshooting undershooting and the settling time are reduced but fine hunting occurs on the changes them selves Set value E Proportional Band x 10 Compensation When this parameter is set to Enabled the proportional band is increased by a factor of 10 Use this parameter when the proportional band setting range is insufficient Variable type Setting range Default FO BO Proportional Band x 10 0 Disabled Compensation Common 1 Enabled Conditions for use The control method must be set to 2 PID control Note When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON 66 Setting Control Specifications Section 4 3 E Setting the Alpha This parameter sets the 2 PID constant alpha a Note Normally this parameter is left at its default value Variable type Setting range Default D5 95 Alpha Channel 0 00 to 1 00 Conditio
292. ter the service life and the lower the temperature the longer the service life Therefore the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Temperature Controller 3 Mounting two or more Temperature Controllers side by side or mounting Temperature Controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the Temperature Controllers which will shorten their service life If the Temperature Controllers are mounted above each other or side by side use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Temperature Controllers However be sure not to cool only the terminals Doing so will result in measurement errors O Ensuring Measurement Accuracy 1 When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types 2 When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same 3 Mount the Temperature Controller so that it is horizontally level 4 If the measurement accuracy is low check to see if input shift has been set correctly O Precautions for Operation 1 It takes a certain amount of time for the outputs to turn ON from after the power supply is turned ON Due consideration must be given to this time when designing control panels etc 2 It takes 30 minutes from the time the product is turned ON until the
293. the Units and then catch the hooks on the tops of the Units onto the DIN Rail and press the Units onto the DIN Rail until they lock into place 2 Catch the upper hooks onto the DIN Rail Q E BH gj jw E E EE E GE Q E cm Fits ERES 3 Press in on the Units 4 Make sure the Units are locked into place Removal Method Pull down on the hooks with a flat blade screwdriver and lift up on the Units Oo p a 1 Flat blade screwdriver unit mm SARA UJ 5 5555 i Flat blade screwdriver 14 Installation Section 2 1 End Plate Installation Always mount an End Plate on each side of the EJ1 PFP M End Plates 2
294. the system using the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software Small electric oven Temperature Sensor Heater G3NA Solid State Relay Computer Port A connector AA APA KD SORA 89 1 EJ1 E58 CIFQ1 e The EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software can be u parameters from the personal computer sed to set EJ1 Minimum Configuration for Control 3 1 2 Wiring 3 1 3 Setup 1 2 3 Note Section 3 1 e Connect the Temperature Sensor to the input terminals according to the sensor s input type e Connect the Solid State Relay to the output terminals When an EJ1L1 TC2 is used wire the circuits as shown below EJ1LI TC2 Small electric oven I E ty e HAS Temperature Sensor DES Heater CO E 5 85 3 8 8 GO 9 S Use the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Software to set EJ1 parameters from the personal computer Use the following procedure to set the parameters 1 Turn ON the power to the EJ1 Note Do not connect the E58 CIFQ1 when power to the EJ1 is OFF If the Cable is connected when the power to the EJ1 is OFF power will be supplied from the computer and impose a load on the inter nal circuits of the EJ1 2 Connect the computer s USB port to the port A connector on the EJ1 using the Cable Note A driver must be installed to use the Cable For
295. the unit number of the EJ1 between H 00 and H 3F 0 to 63 When broadcasting to all nodes specify H 00 Responses are not returned for broadcasts Function code The function code specifies the command from the host computer The code is set in hexadecimal and is 1 byte long For more infor mation refer to 7 3 Function Codes The text of command based on the function code Specifies vari able addresses and the values for set values in hexadecimal CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check These two bytes store check code calculated from the slave address to the end of the data in hexadecimal Silent interval at least 3 5 characters long A message is processed 1 byte at a time in a 16 bit processing register called the CRC register 1 Aninitial value of H FFFF is set in the CRC register 2 An XOR is taken of the contents of the CRC register and the 1st byte of the message and the result is returned to the CRC register 3 The contents of the CRC register is shifted 1 bit to the right and 0 is placed in the MSB 4 Ifthe bit shifted from the LSB is O step 3 is repeated i e the contents of the register is shifted 1 more bit If the bit shifted from the LSB is 1 an XOR is taken of the contents of the CRC register and H AO01 and the result is returned to the CRC register 5 Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the contents of the register have been shifted 8 bits to the right 6 If the end of the message has not been reached an
296. ticular EJ1 parameter settings are required when using SYSMAC CS CJ series PLCs Leave the parameters set to their default settings When using RS 232C communications turn ON pin 8 of SW2 to select RS 232C communications For the default settings the EJ1 monitor and set values are allocated in the DM Area in the PLC as shown in the following table 113 Programless Communications Contents monitor value D00000 Read Response Bits D00001 Setting Change Response Bits Basic Operations Note 1 2 3 Section 5 1 If the allocated words shown below are already in use change the words referring to Programless Communications Upload Download Data Area Variable Type F0 BO on page 126 and to Programless Communications Upload Download Start Address Variable Type FO BO on page 126 Contents set value DO1000 Read Request Bits DO1001 Setting Change Request Bits When setting programless uploads and downloads be sure that the words being used in PLC memory are not otherwise used in the program or by other devices 4 Check operation Turn OFF the power to the EJ1 and PLC and then turn the power back ON It does not matter which one is turned ON first Refer to the following information and check the operation E Monitoring EJ1 Set Values Use the following procedure to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 pro cess values can be read 1 2 3 Set the Read Request Bits allocated in PLC memory D01
297. tion error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 5 Precautions e 0 is set when an address with no data set is read e f the start address number of elements exceeds FFFF the address returns to 0000 162 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 2 Write to Variable Area This service writes to a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variable Write start Bit Noot elements type address position 0 1 0 2 010 2 Write data for No of elements No of elements x 8 or 4 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response code 0 1 0 2 2 2 4 1 Variable Type and Write Start Address Refer to Parameter List on page 221 2 Bit Position The EJ1 does not support bit access Fixed to 00 3 No of Elements Write data length No of elements For double word 8 digit variable type 39 max 0027H For word 4 digit variable type 79 max 004FH Note The following values apply for the DA 9A variable types Write data length For double word 8 digit variable type 24 max 0018H For word 4 digit variable type 48 max 0030H 4 Response Codes Response code Errorname Case 1002 Command too short The command is not long enough 1101 Area type error The corresponding variable type does not exist 1003 Number of elements The number of data does not match the n
298. tions with the G3ZA5 Bit 5 Expand Unit 6 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA6 Bit 6 Expand Unit 7 Error No error Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA7 Expand Unit 8 Error There is an error in communications with the G3ZA8 B9 Notused SS Brio _ Notused SSS ttt nousa Brig Nous o Brig notus o Bri Noued Bis nouse 242 Status Lists Appendix Internal Communications Error Status C4 84 0004 Bit position Bd Bit description Meaning Bit O Expand Unit 1 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA1 Bit 1 Expand Unit 2 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA2 Bit 2 Expand Unit 3 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA3 Bit 3 Expand Unit 4 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA4 Bit 4 Expand Unit 5 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA5 Bit 5 Expand Unit 6 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA6 Bit 6 Expand Unit 7 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA7 Bit 7 Expand Unit 8 Commu No error Error There is an error in communications with the nications Error G3ZA8 Big Noted
299. tionship between the banks and variable types Variable type Bank Changing the Bank The bank can be switched with an event input internal bus or operation com mand Changing the Bank With The bank can be switched by setting Bank Bit 0 in the Event Input 1 Assign an Event Input ment and Bank Bit 1 in the Event Input 2 Assignment as shown in the fol lowing table Event input 2 Event input 1 Selected bank Note Event input 1 can be used alone to switch between banks O and 1 Internal Buses The internal bus can be used to simultaneously switch the banks of linked Units For details refer to 4 7 3 Internal Buses TC4 and TC2 Operation Commands For details refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands E Bank Number The presently selected bank number can be checked with the following parameter Variable type Setting range Default C4 84 Bank No Monitor Channel 01003 fee 100 Other Functions TC4 and TC2 Section 4 7 4 7 2 Event Inputs TC2 Event Input There are two event inputs in the TC2 Assignment The following diagram shows the parameters that can be set in event input 1 or event input 2 Some of the parameters are for all channels and others are for individual channels EV1 EV2 Settable parameters All channels Channel 1 Disabled Bank bit 0 Bank bit 0 Bank bit 1 Bank bit 1 Stop 0 Run 1 Stop 0 Run 1 Run 0 Stop 1 Run O Stop 1 Auto 0 Manual 1 Aut
300. to 10 V 29 Temperature Unit CH1 H 00000000 C 0 ch H 00000001 F 1 Scaling Upper Limit CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 1000 on e j Scaling Lower Limit CH1 H FFFFF831 to H 0000270F 1999 to 9999 eE m 18 17 Decimal Point Position CH1 H 00000000 No decimal point 0 H 00000001 1 H 00000002 2 H 00000003 3 Input Type CH2 The rest are the same as channel 1 Input Type CH3 TC4 EA A Input Type CH4 TC4 p 0101 a 104 eo i Q N Not used 232 Parameter List Appendix Parameter name Setting monitor range Target Unit TC4 TC2 Control Output 1 Assignment H 00000000 Disabled 0 47 H 00000001 Temperature Controller error 1 H 00000002 All channels All alarm OR 2 H 00000003 All channels All alarm AND 3 H 00000004 All channels Alarm 1 OR 4 H 00000005 All channels Alarm 2 OR 5 H 00000006 All channels Alarm 3 OR 6 H 00000007 All channels Alarm 1 AND 7 H 00000008 All channels Alarm 2 AND 8 H 00000009 All channels Alarm 3 AND 9 H 00000004 All channels Input error OR 10 H 0000000B All channels RSP Input error OR 11 H 0000000D All channels HB Heater Burnout alarm OR 13 H 0000000E All channels HS Heater Short alarm OR 14 H 0000000F All channels OC Heater Overcurrent alarm OR 15 H 00000020 CH1 Alarm 1 32 H 00000021 CH1 Alarm 2 33 H 0
301. ts Request Bits Operation Command nas Operation Command Response Bits Request Bits 1 The Read Request Bits are set by the PLC Communications Operation Command Code Set value XXXX XXXX I 3 The EJ1 refreshes the monitor value When the Read Request Bits are set step 1 steps 2 and 3 performed automatically m 0 m 1 m 2 m 3 4 m e Read Settings With the normal monitor operation the value set under Programless Up load Setting is read to the upload data area in PLC memory With the Read Setting operation the value set under Programless Download Setting is read to the upload data area in PLC memory to confirm that the setting is correct 3 The EJ1 sets the Read Response Bits LC EJ1 Upload Area wa Download Area Address Value A HFU TO42 mo 0003 0003 NE u IE T P q 1 The Read Request Bits are Operation Command Operation Command set by the PLC Communications Operation m 4 Set Value A 4 Set Value A Set Value A Set Value A E Set Value A b Set Value A 3 Programless Same parameter 3 2 The EJ1 refreshes the monitor value 134 Programless Communications Section 5 1 e Read Settings 2 The value set under Programless Download Setting is read to the down load data area in PLC memory This can be used to initialize settings in the PLC memory 3 The EJ1 sets the Read Hesponse Bits PLC Upload Area m Download Area address value A Val
302. tus Save RAM 2 Not used Registration of unit configuration Registration of multiple reads Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bit 8 Write Mode Bit 9 EEPROM Bits 10 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used C4 84 0012 C4 84 0013 C4 84 0000 Bits 0 to 3 Not used EEPROM Error Not used Setting Value Error Not used Bit8 Not used Bit9 Model Information Data Error Bits 10 to 11 Not used Bit 12 Model Information Mismatching Error Bits 13 to 15 Not used Configuration Error A Status C4 84 0002 Bits O to 3 Not used Bits 4 to 7 Not used Bit8 Illegal Unit Arrangement Bits 9 to 11 Not used Bits 12 to 15 Not used C4 84 0013 Section 8 3 199 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors Section 8 4 8 4 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Communications Errors This section provides troubleshooting information for communications errors EST2 2C MV3 CX No Communications between the EST2 2C MV3 CX Thermo Support Soft Thermo Support ware and the EJ1 Software Saus Possible cause Countermeasure the EJ1 supply terminal Cable is not connected dic The EST2 2C MV3 CX Correct the communications settings Thermo Support Software ESOS settings are incorrect iL ora bd Port EJ1 Baud rate 38 4 kbps Data length 7 bit Stop bit 2 bit Parity Even bit
303. type D0 90 Alarm Value 1 to 3 BANK 1999 to 9999 EU O Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to an upper and lower limit alarm or to an LBA A x NN Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 to 3 1999 to 9999 EU rm Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 to 3 1999 to 9999 EU Conditions for use The alarm type must be set to an upper and lower limit alarm upper and lower limit range alarm or upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence Note The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection Hefer to 4 7 1 Bank Function for details on banks 4 4 3 Alarm Hysteresis The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON OFF can be set as follows Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Hysteresis NEM n ol A Alarm value s value e Alarm hysteresis can be set separately for each alarm Variable type Setting range Default Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis Channel 0 1 to 999 2 EU Conditions for use The alarm type must not be set to O Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the O decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 i 83 Setting Alarm Specifications Section 4 4 4 4 4 Standby Sequence The standby sequence can be used so that an alarm will not be output until the process value leaves the alarm range once
304. ue 0004 mo 0004 Setting Change Setting Change Response Bits Request Bits mas Operation Command n42 Operation Command Response Bits Request Bits I I I EJ1 1 The Read Request Bits are set by the PLC Programless Download Setting E Set Value A 7 Set Value A Communications Operation Status Command Code Monitor Value me Set Value A I 2 The EJ1 refreshes the set value e Stop Operation Operation is stopped after a series of operations has been completed 2 The EJ1 clears the Read Response Bits PLC Upload Area 7 Download Area mad Setting Change ae Setting Change Response Bits Request Bits Operation Command m Operation Command Response Bits Request Bits m3 Communications Bud Operation j Status Command Code I I I n I 1 The Read Request Bits are cleared by the PLC B Monitor Values If the monitor value has a decimal point keep the decimal point in mind when handling the monitor value Example monitor value O3E8H or 1000 gt 100 0 The set value in the EJ1 will not change even if the monitor value is changed 135 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Setting Changes 136 PLC E Checking Programless Communications Operation from the PLC To confirm that programless communications are working from the PLC con firm that reserved bit 15 of the Communications Status under the Programless Upload Settings
305. ue will function as the Scaling Upper Limit m Setting Example In this example scaling is set to display O to 5 V as 10 0 to 95 0 Scaling Upper Limit 2 950 Scaling Lower Limit 100 Decimal Point Position 1 4 1 4 Input Shift Correction If there is a significant difference between the temperature at the measure ment point and the location where the temperature display is needed so that the display control performance is unsatisfactory at the present sensor posi tion measurement point the temperature difference can be set as an input shift correction value Variable type Parameter name Settingrange Default D5 95 Input Value 1 for Input Correction 199 9 to 999 9 EU Channel See note 1 Input Shift 1 Channel 199 9 to 999 9 EU See note 2 Input Value 2 for Input Correction 1999 to 9999 EU 1000 Channel See note 1 Input Shift 2 Channel 199 9 to 999 9 EU See note 2 Conditions for use No special conditions Note 1 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection 2 The decimal point position is determined by the sensor selection In this case however the 0 decimal point position setting will be treated as setting 1 53 Setting Input Specifications Simple Shift One point Shift Note Advanced Shift Two point Shift Calculating Input Shift Values 54 Section 4 1 The temperature measurements at all points in the sensor range
306. umber of data mismatch elements 1100 Bit position is not 00 Write data is out of setting range 2201 Operation error 2201 The command cannot be executed during operation 3003 Read only error An attempt was made to write to a read only vari able 7011 Operation error 7011 The command cannot be executed due to a device error 7013 Operation error 7013 The command cannot be executed because the operation command cannot be received 7014 Operation error 7014 The command cannot be executed during backup 7041 Operation error 7041 The command cannot be executed in manual opera tion mode 7042 Operation error 7042 The command cannot be executed in tuning mode 0000 Normal completion Processing was completed normally 7013 7014 7015 Operation error 7015 The command cannot be executed during reset including startup 7041 i 7042 i 163 Detailed Description of Services Section 6 4 6 4 3 Composite Read from Variable Area This service reads in order the contents of specified addresses in a variable area E Command Service Request PDU MRC SRC Variablel Read address Bit m Variable Read address Bit type position type positio 0 1 0 4 010 O 00 2 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 E Response Service Response PDU MRC SRC Response Variable Read data code type 01110 4 2 5 4 2 No of elements x 8 or 4 EE Variable Read data type 2 No of elements x 8 or 4 The read data is read together
307. urnout Latch and Latch Cancel The heater burnout alarm latch can be used to keep the HB Alarm ON once it goes ON The latch can be released by executing an operation command Reset Error or Software Reset cycling the power or setting the Heater Burnout Detection Value to 0 0 A Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Commands for details on the opera tion commands Variable type Setting range Default E4 A4 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 Latch I O 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped Detecting Current Errors Installing Current Transformers CT HB Alarm Section 4 5 Connect the CT in advance to terminals A8 and A9 CT1 or A7 and A9 CT2 and pass the heater power line through the CT s hole Refer to Current Trans former on page 218 for details on compatible CT specifications models and dimensions 1 Single phase Heaters Install the CT as shown below Load Heater example AC line To CT input 2 hree phase Heaters Two CTs are required when using a three phase power supply regardless of the type of wiring a Delta Connection Refer to the following diagram for CT installation po sitions Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here so take that into account when setting the detection current Load Heater example AC line To CT input AC line To CT input b Star Connection Refer to the following diagram for CT installation po sitions
308. urrent again taking into consideration able the voltage range of the heater power supply and current measurement error Procedure The heater current value exceeds 100 A e Reduce the value to 100 A or less The heater current is direct current DC e The HB alarm will not operate under these conditions A pure metal heater is used e Measure the heater current and set the detection current value 213 Determining the Error from the Current Situation for Heater Burnout Alarm Errors Section 8 8 214 SPECIACAMONSS vc SS MR aeq A ae are ES Raras tirar TL he UT CRhatdcte FSCIeS rs ius ne fe CR UNS a eae Roda Current IransfODRIeE Aids SPE CIMCALLIONS ee x des ion epis ove bk ote aep dee hed bits DIMENSIONS c awe S RS was RERO DECRE rds AS C IL Table so ds sew ex AI d Sae quaa rake Sensor Input Ranges dis ita Parameter List taa ies ea AN IE IS US ETETE 8 ar o dU gari en eae A a Fer eae Parameters That Can Be Allocated for Programless Communications 216 216 217 218 218 218 219 220 221 240 232 Appendix 215 Specifications Appendix Specifications Ratings 24 VDC Operating voltage range 85 to 110 of rated voltage Power consumption at maximum load 5Wma awm pwm fe Sensor inputs Thermocouple K J T E L U N R S B W PLII ENE Platinum resistance Pt100 JPt100 thermometer Infrared Thermosensor 10 to 70 C 60 to 120 C 115 to 165 C 140to260 C ta 0 Analog Current input
309. us of functions shown in the following diagram can be allocated to output them to bus outputs 1 to 3 Bus output 2 Bus output 3 ESTEE Bus output 2 and bus output 3 can be set in the same way Disabled Temperature Controller Error Event inputs 1 to 4 Bus inputs 1 to 3 Temperature The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when any Controller error bit between bit O and bit 13 is ON in the Device A Status It can Bus output 1 be used to output EJ1 error status Refer to Status Lists on page 240 for details on Device A Status Event inputs 1 to 4 Outputs the ON OFF status of event input 1 to event input 4 Bus inputs 1 to 3 Outputs the status of bus input 1 to bus input 3 Variable type Setting range Default F2 B2 Bus Output 1 to Bus Output 3 Assign 0 to 22 ment Common Conditions for use No special conditions Note This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effective the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON Refer to Parameter List on page 221 for details on the settings 153 Other HFU Functions Section 5 3 e Temperature Controller Error The Temperature Controller Error output will turn ON when any bit between bit O and bit 13 is ON in the Device A Status It can be used to output EJ1 error status Refer Status Lists on page 240 for details on Device A
310. ut 2 Assignment CT2 Assignment Example 2 Three phase heater burnout detection is performed on channel 1 s control output heating Channel 1 Control Output Heating CT1 Assignment 1 OUT1 CT2 Assignment 1 OUT1 4 5 2 Heater Burnout Alarm HB Alarm A heater burnout is detected by measuring the heater current while the control output heating is ON For details refer to the following table Heater burnout detection cannot be used with the control output for cooling Control output heating Power to heater HB Alarm output ON Yes Normal See note 1 No Heater burnout ON time See note 2 OFF time EE i a ON Control output heating OFF 87 Detecting Current Errors 88 Note Note Section 4 5 1 In the above diagram power is considered to be ON normal if the heater current is greater than the heater burnout detection current during the ON time If the heater is burned out the current measured at the current transformer decreases When the current falls below the channel s Heat er Burnout Detection Value a heater burnout alarm HB Alarm will be output 2 Heater burnouts are not detected if the control output heating ON time is 100 ms or less Detection is also sometimes not possible if a contactor is used for the control output Variable type Setting range D6 96 See note 3 Heater Burnout 1 or 2 0 0 HB Alarm OFF Detection I O 0 1 to 9
311. values in PLC memo ry first and then set the Setting Change Request Bits 137 Programless Communications Section 5 1 Operation Commands 138 B Set Values e f the set value contains a decimal point omit the decimal point and set the value Example 100 0 gt 1000 or OSE8H set value e When changing set values always set a new value within the setting range The set value will not be changed if a value outside the range is set When the EJ1 confirms that the Operation Command Request Bits have been set by the PLC the EJ1 reads the operation command code set in PLC mem ory and accepts the operation command To execute an operation command set the operation command code in the PLC memory words corresponding to the Programless Download Settings and then set the Operation Command Request Bits Note Refer to 5 1 5 Operation Command Codes for Programless Com munications for information on operation command codes e Single Operation Command Operation commands are accepted only once 4 The EJ1 sets the Operation Command Response Bits PLC Upload Area E Download Area fAddress Memory fadress Memoy Read Response jf Bits i Read Request Bits Setting uc Response Bits Request Bits p 4 3 Communications The EJ1 reads the operation 1 The Operation Command Code command code is changed by the PLC a di 0 1 n 2 3 n PLC Up
312. vent inputs across terminals A4 and A6 for the TC2 and terminals A1 and A6 for the HFU 1 1 D Eva T EV4 1 ez EV3 3 L EV3 A3 i A3 1 i O 3 I O a EV1 o gt EV1 e E I E 1 Contact inputs Non contact inputs e The inflow current is approximately 4 mA Use event inputs under the following conditions Contact inputs ON 1 kQ max OFF 100 kQ min Non contact ON Residual voltage 1 5 V max OFF Leakage current 0 1 mA inputs max e For communications with the host connect communications across termi nals B7 and B8 or terminals A7 to A9 on the HFU or connect across ter minals 1 and 2 or terminals 6 and 7 on the EDU B B7 A7 SD A C gt B8 a8 lt RD A9 SG RDB gt SDB RDA gt gt SDA DO NOT USE RS 422 RS 485 RS 232C RS 422 Port C communications HFU B gt B gt e A gt A gt ea RS 485 port A RS 485 port B communications communications EDU e f there are problems with communications noise performance when using the port A connector connect 110 to 125 Q of terminating resistance across terminals 1 and 2 of port A on the EDU Wiring Terminals Section 2 2 e Specify both ends of the transmission path including the host computer as end nodes i e connect terminators to both end The minimum termi nating resistance is 54 Q ll Connection Example Host Shield EM
313. vercurrent Alarm parameter to 0 0 or 100 0 Use the 0 0 and 100 0 settings to check operation 4 This parameter can be set only when operation is stopped The hysteresis setting prevents chattering at the detection point When this parameter has been changed the new setting becomes effec tive the next time a software reset is performed for the Unit or the next time power is turned ON e Control will be continued even when there is an OC Alarm e The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual cur rent flowing to the heater Check the current value in an actual operating state in the Heater Current Value 1 or 2 Monitor parameter e f there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states detection may become unstable To stabilize detection set a cur rent value difference of at least 1 0 A for heaters of less than 10 0 A and at least 2 5 A for heaters of 10 0 A or more If the heater current is too low loop the load line several times through a CT as shown in the diagram below Looping it through twice will double the detection current Load line CT B Heater Overcurrent Latch and Latch Cancel The heater overcurrent latch can be used to keep a heater OC Alarm ON once it goes ON The latch can be released by executing an operation command Reset Error or Software Reset cycling the power or setting the Heater Overcurrent Detection Value to 100 0 A Refer to 6 4 11 Operation Comman
314. when the alarm latch function is used e Save RAM Data 2 Writes the settings for parameters that can be changed during operation to EEPROM Parameter Initialization Returns the current set values to their default values The setting is not saved to EEPROM however so Save RAM Data 2 should be executed if required Execute Save RAM Data 2 only when control operations are stopped for all channels Save RAM Data 2 Writes settings except read only settings to EEPROM Execute Save RAM Data 2 only when control operations are stopped for all channels Register Unit Configuration Registers or resets the G3ZA Unit Configuration Refer to 4 7 4 Using G3ZA Multi channel Power Controllers for details on Unit configuration registration Execute Save RAM Data 2 only when control operations are stopped for all channels Response Codes Response code Erormame Caws 0402 Operation error The command cannot be executed because 0402 the model or version is not the same 2201 Operation error The command cannot be executed during 2201 operation 2202 Operation error The command cannot be executed because 2202 operation is stopped 2203 Operation error e The command cannot be executed in nor 2203 mal mode e The command cannot be executed in man ufacturer mode 7011 Operation error The command cannot be executed due to a 7011 device error 7012 Operation error The command cannot be executed due to a 7012 conf

EJ1 Modular Temperature Controllers User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents